WO2022061735A1 - Wireless communication method and device - Google Patents

Wireless communication method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022061735A1
WO2022061735A1 PCT/CN2020/117817 CN2020117817W WO2022061735A1 WO 2022061735 A1 WO2022061735 A1 WO 2022061735A1 CN 2020117817 W CN2020117817 W CN 2020117817W WO 2022061735 A1 WO2022061735 A1 WO 2022061735A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
srs
time slot
trigger
signaling
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/117817
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
史志华
陈文洪
田杰娇
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/117817 priority Critical patent/WO2022061735A1/en
Priority to CN202080102886.4A priority patent/CN115804221A/en
Publication of WO2022061735A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022061735A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/12Wireless traffic scheduling

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication, and more particularly, to wireless communication methods and devices.
  • the network device can trigger the terminal device to transmit aperiodic SRS through aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling can only trigger the transmission of the aperiodic SRS on the uplink corresponding to the cell X.
  • this triggering method has many limitations for scenarios with multiple cells. For example, a carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) scenario.
  • Carrier Aggregation, CA Carrier Aggregation
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method and device, which can realize the triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in a multi-cell scenario.
  • a wireless communication method including:
  • Receive first indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
  • a wireless communication method including:
  • Send first indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
  • a wireless communication method including:
  • Receive second indication information where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
  • a wireless communication method including:
  • a terminal device configured to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • the terminal device includes a functional module for executing the method in the first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a network device for executing the method in the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • the network device includes a functional module for executing the method in the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a terminal device for executing the method in the third aspect or each of its implementations.
  • the terminal device includes a functional module for executing the method in the third aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a network device for executing the method in the fourth aspect or each of its implementations.
  • the network device includes a functional module for executing the method in the fourth aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a terminal device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used for storing a computer program
  • the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used for storing a computer program
  • the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a terminal device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used for storing a computer program
  • the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the third aspect or each of its implementations.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used for storing a computer program
  • the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above fourth aspect or each of its implementations.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a chip for implementing any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or the method in each implementation manner thereof.
  • the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or each of its implementations method in .
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, the computer program causing a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or each of its implementations.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a computer program product, comprising computer program instructions, the computer program instructions causing a computer to perform the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or implementations thereof.
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a computer program that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or the respective implementations thereof.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device on at least one second cell, in other words, it can realize the multi-cell scenario. Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers).
  • FIG. 1 is an example of a system framework provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are schematic interaction diagrams of a wireless communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120 .
  • the network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 through the air interface. Multi-service transmission is supported between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 .
  • the embodiment of the present application only uses the communication system 100 for exemplary description, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. That is to say, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, LTE time division duplex (Time Division Duplex, TDD), universal mobile communication system (Universal mobile communication system) Mobile Telecommunication System, UMTS), 5G communication system (also known as New Radio (New Radio, NR) communication system), or future communication systems, etc.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • Universal mobile communication system Universal mobile communication system
  • Mobile Telecommunication System Universal mobile communication system
  • UMTS Universal mobile communication system
  • 5G communication system also known as New Radio (New Radio, NR) communication system
  • future communication systems etc.
  • the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110 .
  • An access network device may provide communication coverage for a particular geographic area, and may communicate with terminal devices 110 (eg, UEs) located within the coverage area.
  • the network device 120 may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, or a next generation radio access network (Next Generation Radio Access Network, NG RAN) device, Or a base station (gNB) in an NR system, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable Devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, or network devices in the future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN).
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, which includes, but is not limited to, a terminal device that adopts a wired or wireless connection with the network device 120 or other terminal devices.
  • the terminal equipment 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, end devices in 5G networks or end devices in future evolved networks, etc.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the terminal device 110 may be used for device-to-device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.
  • D2D Device to Device
  • the wireless communication system 100 may further include a core network device 130 that communicates with the base station, and the core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, for example, an Access and Mobility Management Function (Access and Mobility Management Function). , AMF), another example, authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), another example, user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), another example, session management function (Session Management Function, SMF).
  • the core network device 130 may also be an evolved packet core (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of an LTE network, for example, a session management function+core network data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW- C) Equipment.
  • EPC evolved packet core
  • the SMF+PGW-C can simultaneously implement the functions that the SMF and the PGW-C can implement.
  • the above-mentioned core network equipment may also be called by other names, or a new network entity may be formed by dividing the functions of the core network, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the various functional units in the communication system 100 may also establish a connection through a next generation network (next generation, NG) interface to implement communication.
  • NG next generation network
  • the terminal equipment establishes an air interface connection with the access network equipment through the NR interface to transmit user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal equipment can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (N1 for short); access Network equipment, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (N3 for short); the access network equipment can establish a control plane signaling with the AMF through the NG interface 2 (N2 for short).
  • gNB next generation wireless access base station
  • UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (N4 for short); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (N6 for short); AMF can communicate with SMF through NG interface 11 (N11 for short)
  • the SMF establishes a control plane signaling connection; the SMF can establish a control plane signaling connection with the PCF through the NG interface 7 (N7 for short).
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows one base station, one core network device and two terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple base station devices and the coverage area of each base station may include other numbers of terminals equipment, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a device having a communication function in the network/system can be referred to as a communication device.
  • the communication device may include a network device 120 and a terminal device 110 with a communication function, and the network device 120 and the terminal device 110 may be the devices described above, which will not be repeated here;
  • the communication device may further include other devices in the communication system 100, such as other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method, which can be used to determine a time slot for sending an SRS.
  • the Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) signal is an important reference signal in the 5G/NR system and is widely used in various functions in the NR system.
  • the SRS can be used in the following scenarios:
  • Non-Codebook based 7. Cooperate with the uplink transmission based on non-codebook (Non-Codebook based).
  • a network device can configure one or more SRS resource groups (SRS Resource sets) for a terminal device, and each SRS Resource set can configure one or more SRS resources (SRS resources).
  • SRS Resource sets SRS resource groups
  • SRS resources SRS resources
  • the transmission of the SRS can be divided into periodic (Periodic), semi-persistent (Semi-persistent), and aperiodic (Aperiodic).
  • Periodic SRS refers to periodically transmitted SRS, and its period and time slot offset are configured by RRC signaling. Once the terminal device receives the corresponding configuration parameters, it will send SRS according to a certain period until the RRC configuration is invalid.
  • the spatial correlation information (Spatial Relation Info) of the periodic SRS is also configured by RRC signaling.
  • the spatial correlation information may indicate a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS), a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (Synchronization Signal/PBCH Block, SSB) or a reference SRS.
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
  • SSB Synchrononization Signal/PBCH Block
  • the transmission beam of the periodic SRS may be indicated in an implicit manner.
  • the terminal device determines the transmission beam of the periodic SRS according to the indicated CSI-RS/SSB.
  • the terminal device may determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the SRS resource through the spatial correlation information of the SRS resource.
  • the period and slot offset of semi-persistent SRS are configured by RRC signaling, but its activation and deactivation signaling is carried by MAC CE.
  • the terminal device starts to transmit SRS after receiving the activation signaling until it receives the deactivation signaling.
  • the spatially related information (transmission beam) of the semi-persistent SRS is carried along with the MAC CE that activates the SRS.
  • the terminal equipment After receiving the period and time slot offset configured by RRC, the terminal equipment determines the time slot that can be used to transmit SRS according to the following formula:
  • T SRS and T offset are the configured period and offset
  • n f are the radio frame and time slot numbers, respectively.
  • Aperiodic SRS transmission means that the network device can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device through DCI.
  • the trigger signaling for triggering aperiodic SRS transmission can be either through the DCI bearer for scheduling PUSCH/PDSCH in the UE-specific search space or the common search space (Common search space), or through the DCI format 2_3 in the common search space. bear.
  • DCI format 2_3 can not only be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission, but also can be used to configure a power control command (TPC) command of SRS on a group of UEs or a group of carriers at the same time.
  • TPC power control command
  • the trigger signaling of the SRS indicates that the SRS resource group with the higher layer parameter aperiodic SRS resource trigger (aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger) set to 3 is used for SRS transmission.
  • aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger aperiodic SRS resource trigger set to 3 is used for SRS transmission.
  • the terminal device After receiving the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (eg DCI), the terminal device performs SRS transmission on the aperiodic SRS resource group indicated by the trigger signaling.
  • the time slot offset (slot offset) between the trigger signaling and the SRS transmission may be configured by higher layer signaling (RRC).
  • RRC higher layer signaling
  • the network device pre-instructs the terminal device configuration parameters of each SRS resource group through high-level signaling, including time-frequency resources, sequence parameters, power control parameters, and the like.
  • the terminal device can also determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the resource through the spatial correlation information of the resource, and the spatial correlation information can be configured for each SRS through RRC resource.
  • the uplink and downlink resources can be transmitted through high-level signaling and physical layer signaling. to indicate and adjust. Therefore, some symbols in a slot or a slot may be used for transmission in different directions at different times, for example, a certain time can be used for uplink transmission, and a certain time can be used for downlink transmission.
  • slot offset can be configured by high-level signaling, which is equivalent to before the RRC signaling reconfigures other values.
  • the time slot offset between each trigger signaling and SRS transmission is constant, resulting in a fixed relative position between the time slot used to receive the trigger signaling and the time slot used to send the SRS, which increases the restriction and Reduced system flexibility.
  • the time slot offset is k
  • the SRS is to be triggered to transmit on slot n+k
  • the corresponding trigger signaling can only be sent on slot n, which limits the timing of sending trigger signaling, and gives the network device
  • the scheduling of jobs adds additional unnecessary constraints.
  • a certain aperiodic SRS may not be transmitted. For example, if slot n+k is changed to be used for downlink transmission, the trigger SRS signaling sent on slot n is invalid, or the trigger signaling cannot be sent on slot n.
  • the terminal device can transmit SRS on slot n+k or the first valid slot after that.
  • SRS SRS on slot n+k or the first effective slot after that.
  • the effective slot is not It is fixed and needs to be determined according to related configurations or factors (eg, uplink and downlink time slot configuration and/or indication).
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method.
  • a time slot that can or can be used to transmit an SRS is referred to as a valid time slot (valid slot).
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the method 200 may be executed interactively by a terminal device and a network device.
  • the terminal device shown in FIG. 2 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 1
  • the network device shown in FIG. 2 may be the access network device shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the method 200 may include:
  • the terminal device receives first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
  • the terminal device may trigger the terminal device to send SRS on the at least one second cell.
  • the cell involved in the embodiments of the present application may be equivalent to the carrier.
  • a cell may be equivalent to a component carrier (Component Carrier, CC) in a CA scenario.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate that the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first carrier is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second carrier.
  • the at least one second cell may be a cell, a group of cells, or a plurality of cells, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the at least one second cell is a second cell
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell can be used to trigger the SRS on another cell .
  • the at least one second cell is a group of cells
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate that the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell can be used to trigger the SRS on a group of cells.
  • the at least one second cell is a plurality of cells
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate that the SRS triggering command on the first cell can be used to trigger the SRS on the multiple cells.
  • the group of cells or the plurality of cells may include the first cell or may not include the first cell, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device on at least one second cell, in other words, the cross-cell (or Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across carriers).
  • the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, used to trigger the first The SRS on the cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
  • the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first cell or the first BWP can be understood as: the first indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP , and the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell. Equivalently, for different cells, or for different BWPs of a cell, the cells that are configured to activate the aperiodic SRS at the same time may be different. Thereby, the flexibility of configuration can be improved, thereby improving the optimization performance of the network device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or in aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell
  • the first trigger state is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
  • the first indication information is configured for the first trigger state, and the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell.
  • two different trigger states may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on different cells.
  • trigger state 1 may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0 and cell 1
  • trigger state 2 may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0, cell 1, and cell 2.
  • the first indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for a terminal device.
  • the first indication information is configured for the trigger state of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between the first trigger state indicated by the first indication information and the at least one second cell is applicable to each cell of the terminal device, or to each BWP of each cell of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information involved in the embodiments of the present application may be configured for a target cell group (Cell group) of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is configured for a trigger state on a target cell group of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between the first trigger state indicated by the first indication information and the at least one second cell is applicable to each cell of the one target cell group, or to each BWP of each cell of the one target cell group.
  • the target cell group may refer to a cell group under a dual connection (Dual Connection, DC).
  • a dual connection for example, a master cell group (MCG, Master Cell group), or a secondary cell group (SCG, Secondary Cell group).
  • MCG Master Cell group
  • SCG Secondary Cell group
  • the cell group formed by at least one second cell or at least one third cell involved in this application can be understood as a cell group formed by one or more cells that can be triggered by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling; The first cell group, the second cell group, the cell group indicated by the first indication information, or the cell group indicated by the second information.
  • the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  • the first indication information is carried by first radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling, and the first RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell of the terminal device or the first cell of the cell group (Cell Group), using for triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the cell group.
  • the first indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, and the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell. Equivalently, for different cells or different cells in the same cell group, the cells that are configured to activate the aperiodic SRS at the same time may be the same. Therefore, the network device and the terminal device are simple to implement and process, and the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the first indication information is carried through the second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured through the cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
  • the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used for Triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell.
  • the first indication information indicates that the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell through the indication field in the RRC.
  • the at least one second cell is all active cells of the terminal equipment to which it belongs, or the at least one second cell is the terminal to which it belongs
  • the device corresponds to all active cells of the cell group.
  • the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the at least one second cell is the first cell and all active cells in the first cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  • the at least one second cell is the first cell, that is, an aperiodic SRS trigger on the same cell
  • the signaling only triggers aperiodic SRS transmission on the local cell.
  • the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • cell identifier may also be referred to as a cell code, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the method 200 may further include:
  • Receive third RRC signaling where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
  • the terminal device receives the third RRC signaling sent by the network device.
  • the network device sends the third RRC signaling to the terminal device to configure the at least one cell.
  • SRS transmission needs to be performed based on an SRS resource group (SRS-ResourceSet) or an SRS resource (SRS-Resource).
  • the SRS sent by the terminal device may be an SRS resource group or an SRS corresponding to an SRS resource.
  • the slot offset of the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group is configured for the SRS resource group, and the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource is configured for the SRS resource.
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group introduced above may also be referred to as a common SRS.
  • the usage field in the SRS resource group may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource may also be an SRS used for positioning, which is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16, and the corresponding SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • SRS-PosResource-r16 RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell
  • the resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  • the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is from 1 to N-1 the integer.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
  • the second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS
  • the time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell
  • the offset k is the activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset
  • the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  • the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  • the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
  • the third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one second cell
  • the corresponding slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  • the third time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the valid time slot may also be understood as a time slot available for uplink transmission.
  • the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission can be understood as a time slot only used for uplink transmission, that is, it is always used for uplink transmission, it can also be understood as a time slot containing an uplink symbol (uplink symbol), and it can also be understood as a time slot containing flexible symbols.
  • the time slot of (flexible symbol) can also be understood as a flexible time slot (flexible slot), and it can also be understood as a time slot that is occasionally unavailable for uplink transmission, for example, a time slot that is occasionally used for downlink transmission.
  • whether the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission in this application can actually be used for uplink transmission depends on whether it collides with other signal transmissions.
  • the first indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • cell aggregation Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • a cells are configured therein.
  • the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group on cell Z is configured through RRC signaling SRS-ResourceSet, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-Resource.
  • the usage field in the SRS-ResourceSet signaling may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
  • beamManagement beam management
  • codebook codebook
  • nonCodebook non-codebook
  • antenna switching antenna switching
  • each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point.
  • the above multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList in the SRS-ResourceSet IE, where aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is configured with one value, and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is configured with one or more values.
  • aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
  • the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used.
  • the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
  • aperiodic SRS trigger states Maximum number of SRS trigger states
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
  • the network device For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells can trigger the SRS on the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z triggers all current The corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on the active cell. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, cell Z or aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the BWP Y of cell Z Aperiodic SRS transmissions corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells are triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, cell Z or aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the BWP Y of cell Z
  • Aperiodic SRS transmissions corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells are triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell.
  • aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z is triggered.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as value for short). is the first value), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value.
  • the corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling such as DCI
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated).
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
  • slot n can be determined using the following formula:
  • the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS
  • the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling
  • the k represents the corresponding SRS resource group. slot offset, where n represents the first slot.
  • slot n’ can be determined based on the following formula:
  • the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS
  • the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling
  • the and the u offset, PDCCH respectively depends on the time slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for receiving the physical downlink control channel PDCCH and u offset
  • the and the u offset, the SRS respectively depends on the slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for transmitting the SRS and u offset
  • the k represents the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group
  • the n represents the first slot.
  • u offset may be the relevant parameters of the slot offset for CA specified in the communication standard.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the preset value in option 1 is exemplified below.
  • an example of an indication field in an RRC signaling for option 1 can be set as follows.
  • the names and positions are only examples of the present application, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
  • the preset value of the indication field can be set to ⁇ FALSE, TRUE ⁇ ; if an indication field is configured, and the value of the indication field is FALSE, the original triggering method is used, that is, only in the corresponding aperiodic SRS trigger signaling The corresponding aperiodic SRS is triggered on cell Z; if the value of the indication field is TRUE, the triggering method provided by this application is used.
  • the preset value of the indication field can be set to ⁇ TRUE ⁇ ; if the indication field is not configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. ; If this indication field is configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
  • the preset value of the indication field can be set to ⁇ FALSE ⁇ ; if the indication field is configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling ; If this indication field is not configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
  • the preset value of the indication field can be set to ⁇ Enable, Disable ⁇ ; if an indication field is configured, and the value of the indication field is Disable, the original triggering method is used, that is, it is only corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is triggered on the cell Z of the specified field; if the value of the indication field is Enable, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
  • the preset value of the indication field can be set to ⁇ Enable ⁇ ; if the indication field is not configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. ; If this indication field is configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
  • the preset value of the indication field can be set to ⁇ Disable ⁇ ; if the indication field is configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. ; If this indication field is not configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
  • the indication field may be a field for carrying a preset value.
  • it can be configured through SRS-Config or ServingCellConfig.
  • SRS-Config SRS-Config
  • ServingCellConfig SRS-Config
  • the names and positions are only examples of the present application, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
  • RRC signaling for option 2 and option 3 can be configured by the value in the "BIT STRING(SIZE(T))" format, where T in SIZE(T) is a positive integer, indicating how many bits in total .
  • T in SIZE(T) is a positive integer, indicating how many bits in total .
  • it can be configured through SRS-Config, UplinkConfig or ServingCellConfig.
  • SRS-Config UplinkConfig
  • UplinkConfig ServingCellConfig
  • SRS-Config UplinkConfig
  • ServingCellConfig are only examples of configurations for configuring RRC signaling in this application, and should not be construed as limitations on this application.
  • the RRC signaling may also be configured through other parameters.
  • BWP-Uplink For example, BWP-Uplink, BWP-UplinkCommon, BWP-UplinkDedicated, ServingCellConfigCommon, SpCellConfig, or SCellConfig.
  • the first indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • step 1 in Embodiment 2 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the network device For cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information that the aperiodic SRS trigger state S on cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z can trigger SRS on one or more cells.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z corresponds to the aperiodic SRS trigger state S
  • the SRS on the one or more cells is triggered.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering state S is a non-zero state.
  • corresponding different cells may be configured for different aperiodic SRS triggering states.
  • the trigger state S corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on the cell Z, If the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells of the terminal device is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic data sent on the cell Z SRS trigger signaling, if the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, and the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the network device sends the data on cell Z.
  • the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S
  • the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered.
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell.
  • aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z is triggered.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z, and the trigger state S>0 corresponding to the first signaling (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) ), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling referred to as the first signaling
  • the trigger state S>0 corresponding to the first signaling the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value value of the first signaling is sent.
  • a trigger state is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z', so there is an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value on each Z'.
  • the corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling such as DCI
  • the time slot offset offset corresponding to the SRS resource group (the value is represented by k, this way corresponds to the case of configuring a time slot offset for the SRS resource group, or activating a time slot offset), or the MAC
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group activated by the signaling (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time corresponding to the SRS resource group indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the slot offset k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the first indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, that is, the target cell group described above.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • step 1 in Embodiment 3 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the network device For a terminal device or a target cell group, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells on which the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling can trigger the SRS on the terminal device, or on which cells corresponding to the target cell group can trigger the SRS. SRS.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on cell Z is used to indicate which cells can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on which cells.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the terminal equipment cell Z, or any cell Z in the cell group, sends a non- The periodic SRS triggering signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all currently active cells of the terminal device. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group.
  • the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells.
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell.
  • it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group.
  • the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling may be configured through CellGroupConfig.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value is recorded as value), then on the previously determined cell
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent.
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value.
  • the corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of cell Z, and the terminal device determines the slot corresponding to cell Z according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. Transmission of SRS resources on n'
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated).
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the solution in which the first indication information is used to trigger the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group has been described above with reference to Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 3.
  • the following describes the first indication information used to trigger the SRS resource in combination with Embodiment 4 to Embodiment 6.
  • the corresponding SRS is described.
  • the first indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • cell aggregation Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • a cells are configured therein.
  • the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16.
  • each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point.
  • multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 in SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
  • the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used.
  • the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device can determine N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
  • aperiodic SRS trigger states Maximum number of SRS trigger states
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config
  • the network device For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells can trigger the SRS on the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z triggers the corresponding non-periodic SRS on all currently active cells of the terminal equipment. Periodic SRS transmission. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z triggers the terminal equipment in the Corresponding aperiodic SRS transmissions on all active cells in a set of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z triggers the terminal equipment in the Corresponding aperiodic SRS transmissions on all active cells in a set of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) , that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling referred to as the first signaling
  • the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) , that is, a non-zero trigger state
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value.
  • the corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource.
  • SRS trigger signaling such as DCI
  • time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated
  • SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets)
  • the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the first indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • step 1 in Embodiment 5 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the network device For cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information that the aperiodic SRS trigger state S on cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z can trigger SRS on one or more cells.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z corresponds to the aperiodic SRS trigger state S
  • the SRS on the one or more cells is triggered.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering state S is a non-zero state.
  • corresponding different cells may be configured for different aperiodic SRS trigger states S.
  • the trigger state S corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on the cell Z, If the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells of the terminal device is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic data sent on the cell Z SRS trigger signaling, if the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic data sent on the cell Z SRS trigger signaling, if the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z, and the trigger state S>0 corresponding to the first signaling (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) ), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling referred to as the first signaling
  • the trigger state S>0 corresponding to the first signaling the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value value of the first signaling is sent.
  • a trigger state is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z', so there is an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value on each Z'.
  • the corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource.
  • SRS trigger signaling such as DCI
  • time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated
  • SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets)
  • the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the first indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, that is, the target cell group described above.
  • step 1
  • step 1 in Embodiment 5 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the network device For a terminal device, or for a target cell group, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells on which the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling can trigger the SRS on the terminal device, or on which cells corresponding to the target cell group can trigger the SRS. SRS.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on cell Z is used to indicate which cells can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on which cells.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the terminal equipment cell Z, or any cell Z in the cell group, sends a non- The periodic SRS triggering signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all currently active cells of the terminal device. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group.
  • the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells.
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell.
  • it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group.
  • the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered.
  • option 1 it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
  • aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling may be configured through CellGroupConfig.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value is recorded as value), then on the previously determined cell
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent.
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value.
  • the corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource.
  • SRS trigger signaling such as DCI
  • time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated
  • SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets)
  • the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 300 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the method 300 may be executed interactively by a terminal device and a network device.
  • the terminal device shown in FIG. 3 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 1
  • the network device shown in FIG. 3 may be the access network device shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the method 300 may include:
  • the terminal device can trigger the terminal device in the first cell Send SRS on it.
  • the cell involved in the embodiments of the present application may be equivalent to the carrier.
  • a cell may be equivalent to a component carrier (Component Carrier, CC) in a CA scenario.
  • the second indication information can be used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first carrier can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third carrier.
  • the at least one third cell may be a cell, a group of cells, or a plurality of cells, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on another cell .
  • the at least one third cell is a group of cells, it is equivalent to that the second indication information can be used to indicate that the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS on any cell in the group of cells. signaling trigger.
  • the at least one third cell is a plurality of cells, it is equivalent to that the first indication information can be used to indicate that the SRS on the first cell can pass the SRS on any cell in the plurality of cells. Trigger command trigger.
  • the group of cells or the plurality of cells may include the first cell or may not include the first cell, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS triggering command on the at least one third cell, in other words, the cross-cell (or cross-carrier) can be realized in the multi-cell scenario. ) trigger transmission of aperiodic SRS.
  • the at least one third cell may be the same as or different from the at least one second cell mentioned above, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the second indication information is carried through fourth radio resource control RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured through any one of the following:
  • the bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
  • the second indication information indicates through the indication field in the RRC that the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells of the terminal equipment to which it belongs, or the at least one third cell is the terminal to which it belongs
  • the device corresponds to all active cells of the cell group.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells in the first cell and the second cell group community.
  • the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  • the at least one third cell is the first cell, that is, an aperiodic SRS trigger on the same cell
  • the signaling only triggers aperiodic SRS transmission on the local cell.
  • the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • cell identifier may also be referred to as a cell number, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the method 300 may further include:
  • Receive fifth RRC signaling where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
  • the terminal device receives the fifth RRC signaling sent by the network device.
  • the network device sends the fifth RRC signaling to the terminal device to configure the at least one cell.
  • SRS transmission needs to be performed based on an SRS resource group (SRS-ResourceSet) or an SRS resource (SRS-Resource).
  • the SRS sent by the terminal device may be an SRS resource group or an SRS corresponding to an SRS resource.
  • the slot offset of the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group is configured for the SRS resource group, and the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource is configured for the SRS resource.
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group introduced above may also be referred to as a common SRS.
  • the usage field in the SRS resource group may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource may also be an SRS used for positioning, which is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16, and the corresponding SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • SRS-PosResource-r16 RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell
  • the resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  • the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis Takes an integer from 1 to N-1.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method 300 may further include:
  • the fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is an activated timeslot among the multiple timeslot offsets gap offset.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  • the fourth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  • the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
  • the fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell is the multiple timeslot offsets k' Activated slot offset in slot offset.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  • the fifth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the valid time slot may also be understood as a time slot available for uplink transmission.
  • the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission can be understood as a time slot only used for uplink transmission, that is, it is always used for uplink transmission, it can also be understood as a time slot containing an uplink symbol (uplink symbol), and it can also be understood as a time slot containing flexible symbols.
  • the time slot of (flexible symbol) can also be understood as a flexible time slot (flexible slot), and it can also be understood as a time slot that is occasionally unavailable for uplink transmission, for example, a time slot that is occasionally used for downlink transmission.
  • whether the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission in this application can actually be used for uplink transmission depends on whether it collides with other signal transmissions.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • cell aggregation Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • a cells are configured therein.
  • the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group on cell Z is configured through RRC signaling SRS-ResourceSet, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-Resource.
  • the usage field in the SRS-ResourceSet signaling may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
  • beamManagement beam management
  • codebook codebook
  • nonCodebook non-codebook
  • antenna switching antenna switching
  • each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point.
  • the above multiple trigger states are configured by aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList in the SRS-ResourceSet IE, wherein aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is configured with one value, and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is configured with one or more values.
  • aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which takes a value of 4.
  • the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used.
  • the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
  • aperiodic SRS trigger states Maximum number of SRS trigger states
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
  • the network device For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the second indication information which cells the aperiodic SRS transmission of the BWP Y of the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, so as to realize Triggering aperiodic SRS across cells reduces DCI overhead and increases system flexibility.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, and if the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, it is the aperiodic SRS signaling transmitted on all active cells currently of the terminal equipment. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z can be triggered. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. At this time, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS on any cell. Trigger signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells.
  • Aperiodic SRS signaling For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z may be triggered. Compared with option 1, this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. . This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells.
  • Aperiodic SRS signaling For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Both the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z and the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on the cell Z.
  • this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. .
  • This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance.
  • the indication field can reduce the indication of cell Z, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-ResourceSet.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) in one of the above-determined cells (referred to as Z'), and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (referred to as the value of value), the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on cell Z.
  • the corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z', and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located.
  • SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated).
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • cell aggregation Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • a cells are configured therein.
  • the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16.
  • each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point.
  • the above multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 in SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
  • the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used.
  • the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
  • aperiodic SRS trigger states Maximum number of SRS trigger states
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
  • the network device For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the second indication information which cells the aperiodic SRS transmission of the BWP Y of the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, so as to realize Triggering aperiodic SRS across cells reduces DCI overhead and increases system flexibility.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, and if the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS signaling transmitted on all active cells currently of the terminal equipment. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z can be triggered. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. At this time, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS on any cell. Trigger signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z.
  • DCI aperiodic SRS trigger signaling
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells.
  • Aperiodic SRS signaling For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z may be triggered. Compared with option 1, this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. . This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells.
  • Aperiodic SRS signaling For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Both the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z and the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on the cell Z.
  • this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. .
  • This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance.
  • the indication field can reduce the indication of cell Z, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
  • the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
  • the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-ResourceSet.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) in one of the above-determined cells (referred to as Z'), and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (referred to as the value of value), the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on cell Z.
  • the corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z', and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource.
  • SRS resources such as DCI
  • time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated
  • SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets)
  • the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the present application.
  • the implementation of the embodiments constitutes no limitation.
  • the terms “downlink” and “uplink” are used to indicate the transmission direction of signals or data, wherein “downlink” is used to indicate that the transmission direction of signals or data is from the site to the user equipment of the cell In the first direction, “uplink” is used to indicate that the transmission direction of the signal or data is the second direction sent from the user equipment of the cell to the site.
  • downlink signal indicates that the transmission direction of the signal is the first direction.
  • the term “and/or” is only an association relationship for describing associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships. Specifically, A and/or B can represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
  • the character "/" in this document generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 400 may include:
  • the receiving unit 410 is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, used to trigger the first The SRS on the cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or in aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell
  • the first trigger state is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
  • the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  • the first indication information is carried by the first radio resource control RRC signaling, and the first RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
  • the bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell of the terminal device or the first cell of the target cell group of the terminal device , which is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the target cell group.
  • the first indication information is carried through the second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured through the cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
  • the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used for Triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell.
  • the at least one second cell is all active cells.
  • the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the at least one second cell is the first cell and all active cells in the first cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  • the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • the receiving unit 410 is further configured to:
  • Receive third RRC signaling where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell
  • the resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  • the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 410 is further configured to:
  • the second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS
  • the time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell
  • the offset k is the activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k .
  • the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 410 is further configured to:
  • the third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one second cell
  • the corresponding slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k '.
  • the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments.
  • the terminal device 400 shown in FIG. 4 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the terminal device 400 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of a network device 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 500 may include:
  • the sending unit 510 is configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, used to trigger the first The SRS on the cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or in aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell
  • the first trigger state is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
  • the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  • the first indication information is carried by the first radio resource control RRC signaling, and the first RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
  • the bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell of the terminal device or the first cell of the target cell group of the terminal device , which is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the target cell group.
  • the first indication information is carried through the second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured through the cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
  • the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used for Triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell.
  • the at least one second cell is all active cells.
  • the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the at least one second cell is the first cell and all active cells in the first cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  • the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • the sending unit 510 is further configured to:
  • Send third RRC signaling where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell
  • the resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  • the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 510 is further configured to:
  • the second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS
  • the time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell
  • the offset k is the activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k .
  • the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 510 is further configured to:
  • the third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
  • the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one second cell
  • the corresponding slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k '.
  • the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments.
  • the network device 500 shown in FIG. 5 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the network device 500 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 600 may include:
  • the receiving unit 610 is configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
  • the second indication information is carried through fourth radio resource control RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured through any one of the following:
  • the bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells in the first cell and the second cell group community.
  • the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  • the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • the receiving unit 610 is further configured to:
  • Receive fifth RRC signaling where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell
  • the resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  • the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 610 is further configured to:
  • the fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is the multiple timeslots Active slot offset in offset.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  • the fourth time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 610 is further configured to:
  • the fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offsets corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  • the fifth time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments.
  • the terminal device 600 shown in FIG. 6 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 300 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the terminal device 600 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a network device 700 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 700 may include:
  • the sending unit 710 is configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
  • the second indication information is carried through fourth radio resource control RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured through any one of the following:
  • the bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group.
  • the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the at least one third cell is all active cells in the first cell and the second cell group community.
  • the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  • the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • the sending unit 710 is further configured to:
  • Send fifth RRC signaling where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell
  • the resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  • the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 710 is further configured to:
  • the fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is received.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is the multiple timeslots Active slot offset in offset.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  • the fourth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 710 is further configured to:
  • the fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time when the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is received.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offsets corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  • the fifth time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments.
  • the network device 700 shown in FIG. 7 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 300 of the embodiment of the present application, and the foregoing and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 700 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
  • the steps of the method embodiments in the embodiments of the present application may be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor and/or instructions in the form of software, and the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as hardware
  • the execution of the decoding processor is completed, or the execution is completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps in the above method embodiments in combination with its hardware.
  • the receiving unit or the transmitting unit referred to above may be implemented by a transceiver.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 800 may include a processor 810 .
  • the processor 810 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 800 may further include a memory 820 .
  • the memory 820 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions, etc. executed by the processor 810 .
  • the processor 810 may call and run a computer program from the memory 820 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 820 may be a separate device independent of the processor 810 , or may be integrated in the processor 810 .
  • the communication device 800 may also include a transceiver 830 .
  • the processor 810 may control the transceiver 830 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or receive information or data sent by other devices.
  • Transceiver 830 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 830 may further include antennas, and the number of the antennas may be one or more.
  • bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • the communication device 800 may be a terminal device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 800 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 800 may correspond to the terminal device 400 or the terminal device 600 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application, which is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the communication device 800 may be the network device of the embodiments of the present application, and the communication device 800 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 800 in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the network device 500 or the network device 700 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application. This will not be repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip.
  • the chip may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability, and can implement or execute the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip may also be referred to as a system-on-chip, a system-on-chip, a system-on-a-chip, or a system-on-a-chip, or the like.
  • the chip can be applied to various communication devices, so that the communication device installed with the chip can execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip 900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 900 includes a processor 910 .
  • the processor 910 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip 900 may further include a memory 920 .
  • the processor 910 may call and run a computer program from the memory 920 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 920 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions and the like executed by the processor 910 .
  • the memory 920 may be a separate device independent of the processor 910 , or may be integrated in the processor 910 .
  • the chip 900 may further include an input interface 930 .
  • the processor 910 may control the input interface 930 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may acquire information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the chip 900 may further include an output interface 940 .
  • the processor 910 may control the output interface 940 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the chip 900 can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods in the embodiments of the present application, and can also implement the various methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the corresponding process implemented by the terminal device in FIG. 1 is not repeated here.
  • bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • the processors referred to above may include, but are not limited to:
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the processor may be used to implement or execute the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory mentioned above includes but is not limited to:
  • Non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • RAM Static RAM
  • DRAM Dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced SDRAM ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by a portable electronic device including a plurality of application programs, enable the portable electronic device to perform any of the methods 200 or 300. method of the illustrated embodiment.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. , and are not repeated here for brevity.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including a computer program.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. Repeat.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
  • a computer program is also provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can execute the method of the embodiment shown in method 200 or 300 .
  • the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run on the computer, it causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity. , and will not be repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which may include the above-mentioned terminal equipment and network equipment to form a communication system 100 as shown in FIG. 1 , which is not repeated here for brevity.
  • a communication system which may include the above-mentioned terminal equipment and network equipment to form a communication system 100 as shown in FIG. 1 , which is not repeated here for brevity.
  • system and the like in this document may also be referred to as “network management architecture” or “network system” and the like.
  • a software functional unit If implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a stand-alone product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that make contributions to the prior art or the parts of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk or an optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
  • division of units, modules or components in the apparatus embodiments described above is only a logical function division, and other division methods may be used in actual implementation.
  • multiple units, modules or components may be combined or integrated.
  • To another system, or some units or modules or components can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the above-mentioned units/modules/components described as separate/display components may or may not be physically separated, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units/modules/components may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the embodiments of the present application.

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method and device. The method comprises: receiving first indication information, the first indication information being used for indicating that an aperiodic sounding reference signal (SRS) trigger signaling on a first cell is used to trigger an SRS on at least one second cell. By means of first indication information, an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on a first cell can trigger SRS transmission of a terminal device on at least one second cell; that is, triggering of aperiodic SRS transmission across cells (or across carriers) in a multi-cell scenario can be implemented.

Description

无线通信方法和设备Wireless communication method and device 技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及无线通信方法和设备。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication, and more particularly, to wireless communication methods and devices.
背景技术Background technique
在新空口(New Radio,NR)系统中,网络设备可以通过非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备的传输非周期SRS。In a New Radio (New Radio, NR) system, the network device can trigger the terminal device to transmit aperiodic SRS through aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
但是,如果非周期SRS触发信令在小区X上发送,则非周期SRS触发信令只能触发小区X对应上行链路上的传输非周期SRS。但是,这种触发方式针对多小区的场景有很多局限性。例如,载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)场景。However, if the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is sent on the cell X, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling can only trigger the transmission of the aperiodic SRS on the uplink corresponding to the cell X. However, this triggering method has many limitations for scenarios with multiple cells. For example, a carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) scenario.
因此,如何实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)非周期SRS的触发传输是本领域急需解决的技术问题。发明内容Therefore, how to realize the triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in a multi-cell scenario is a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently in the art. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供一种无线通信方法和设备,能够实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)的非周期SRS的触发传输。The embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method and device, which can realize the triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in a multi-cell scenario.
第一方面,提供了一种无线通信方法,包括:In a first aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, including:
接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。Receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
第二方面,提供了一种无线通信方法,包括:In a second aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, including:
发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。Send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
第三方面,提供了一种无线通信方法,包括:In a third aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, including:
接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。Receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
第四方面,提供了一种无线通信方法,包括:In a fourth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, including:
发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。Sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
第五方面,提供了一种终端设备,用于执行上述第一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述终端设备包括用于执行上述第一方面或其各实现方式中的方法的功能模块。In a fifth aspect, a terminal device is provided, which is configured to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof. Specifically, the terminal device includes a functional module for executing the method in the first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第六方面,提供了一种网络设备,用于执行上述第二方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述网络设备包括用于执行上述第二方面或其各实现方式中的方法的功能模块。In a sixth aspect, a network device is provided for executing the method in the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof. Specifically, the network device includes a functional module for executing the method in the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第七方面,提供了一种终端设备,用于执行上述第三方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述终端设备包括用于执行上述第三方面或其各实现方式中的方法的功能模块。In a seventh aspect, a terminal device is provided for executing the method in the third aspect or each of its implementations. Specifically, the terminal device includes a functional module for executing the method in the third aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第八方面,提供了一种网络设备,用于执行上述第四方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述网络设备包括用于执行上述第四方面或其各实现方式中的方法的功能模块。In an eighth aspect, a network device is provided for executing the method in the fourth aspect or each of its implementations. Specifically, the network device includes a functional module for executing the method in the fourth aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第九方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行上述第一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第十方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行上述第二方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a network device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第十一方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行上述第三方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the third aspect or each of its implementations.
第十二方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行上述第四方面或其各实现方式中的方法。A twelfth aspect provides a network device including a processor and a memory. The memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above fourth aspect or each of its implementations.
第十三方面,提供了一种芯片,用于实现上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。A thirteenth aspect provides a chip for implementing any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or the method in each implementation manner thereof. Specifically, the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or each of its implementations method in .
第十四方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。A fourteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, the computer program causing a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or each of its implementations.
第十五方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,所述计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。A fifteenth aspect provides a computer program product, comprising computer program instructions, the computer program instructions causing a computer to perform the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or implementations thereof.
第十六方面,提供了一种计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。A sixteenth aspect provides a computer program that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects or the respective implementations thereof.
基于以上技术方案,通过所述第一指示信息,使得第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,可触发终端设备在至少一个第二小区上的SRS传输,换言之,能够实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)的非周期SRS的触发传输。Based on the above technical solutions, through the first indication information, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device on at least one second cell, in other words, it can realize the multi-cell scenario. Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers).
此外,避免了为每个小区仅通过自己接收的非周期SRS触发信令触发SRS,不仅能够提高触发信令的灵活性,还能够降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的资源消耗。In addition, it is avoided to trigger the SRS for each cell only through the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling received by itself, which can not only improve the flexibility of the trigger signaling, but also reduce the resource consumption of the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI).
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供的系统框架的示例。FIG. 1 is an example of a system framework provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图2和图3是本申请实施例提供的无线通信方法的示意性交互图。FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are schematic interaction diagrams of a wireless communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的示意性框图。FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的示意性框图FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application
图6是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的另一示意性框图。FIG. 6 is another schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的另一示意性框图。FIG. 7 is another schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例提供的通信设备的示意性框图。FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图9是本申请实施例提供的芯片的示意性框图。FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts shall fall within the protection scope of the present application.
图1是本申请实施例的一个应用场景的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
如图1所示,通信系统100可以包括终端设备110和网络设备120。网络设备120可以通过空口与终端设备110通信。终端设备110和网络设备120之间支持多业务传输。As shown in FIG. 1 , the communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120 . The network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 through the air interface. Multi-service transmission is supported between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 .
应理解,本申请实施例仅以通信系统100进行示例性说明,但本申请实施例不限定于此。也就是说,本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、5G通信系统(也称为新无线(New Radio,NR)通信系统),或未来的通信系统等。It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application only uses the communication system 100 for exemplary description, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. That is to say, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, LTE time division duplex (Time Division Duplex, TDD), universal mobile communication system (Universal mobile communication system) Mobile Telecommunication System, UMTS), 5G communication system (also known as New Radio (New Radio, NR) communication system), or future communication systems, etc.
在图1所示的通信系统100中,网络设备120可以是与终端设备110通信的接入网设备。接入网设备可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备110(例如UE)进行通信。In the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 , the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110 . An access network device may provide communication coverage for a particular geographic area, and may communicate with terminal devices 110 (eg, UEs) located within the coverage area.
网络设备120可以是长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者是下一代无线接入网(Next Generation Radio Access Network,NG RAN)设备,或者是NR系统中的基站(gNB),或者是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)中的无线控制器,或者该网络设备120可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备、集线器、交换机、网桥、路由器,或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的网络设备等。The network device 120 may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, or a next generation radio access network (Next Generation Radio Access Network, NG RAN) device, Or a base station (gNB) in an NR system, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable Devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, or network devices in the future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN).
终端设备110可以是任意终端设备,其包括但不限于与网络设备120或其它终端设备采用有线或者无线连接的终端设备。The terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, which includes, but is not limited to, a terminal device that adopts a wired or wireless connection with the network device 120 or other terminal devices.
例如,所述终端设备110可以指接入终端、用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进网络中的终端设备等。For example, the terminal equipment 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, user agent, or user device. The access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, end devices in 5G networks or end devices in future evolved networks, etc.
终端设备110可以用于设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)的通信。The terminal device 110 may be used for device-to-device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.
无线通信系统100还可以包括与基站进行通信的核心网设备130,该核心网设备130可以是5G核心网(5G Core,5GC)设备,例如,接入与移动性管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF),又例如,认证服务器功能(Authentication Server Function,AUSF),又例如,用户面功能(User Plane Function,UPF),又例如,会话管理功能(Session Management Function,SMF)。可选地,核心网络设备130也可以是LTE网络的分组核心演进(Evolved Packet Core,EPC)设备,例如,会话管理功能+核心网络的数据网关(Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway,SMF+PGW-C)设备。应理解,SMF+PGW-C可以同时实现SMF和PGW-C所能实现的功能。在网络演进过程中,上述核心网设备也有可能叫其它名字,或者通过对核心网的功能进行划分形成新的网络实体,对此本申请实施例不做限制。The wireless communication system 100 may further include a core network device 130 that communicates with the base station, and the core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, for example, an Access and Mobility Management Function (Access and Mobility Management Function). , AMF), another example, authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), another example, user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), another example, session management function (Session Management Function, SMF). Optionally, the core network device 130 may also be an evolved packet core (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of an LTE network, for example, a session management function+core network data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW- C) Equipment. It should be understood that the SMF+PGW-C can simultaneously implement the functions that the SMF and the PGW-C can implement. In the process of network evolution, the above-mentioned core network equipment may also be called by other names, or a new network entity may be formed by dividing the functions of the core network, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
通信系统100中的各个功能单元之间还可以通过下一代网络(next generation,NG)接口建立连接实现通信。The various functional units in the communication system 100 may also establish a connection through a next generation network (next generation, NG) interface to implement communication.
例如,终端设备通过NR接口与接入网设备建立空口连接,用于传输用户面数据和控制面信令;终端设备可以通过NG接口1(简称N1)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;接入网设备例如下一代无线接入基站(gNB),可以通过NG接口3(简称N3)与UPF建立用户面数据连接;接入网设备可以通过NG接口2(简称N2)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口4(简称N4)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口6(简称N6)与数据网络交互用户面数据;AMF可以通过NG接口11(简称N11)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;SMF可以通过NG接口7(简称N7)与PCF建立控制面信令连接。For example, the terminal equipment establishes an air interface connection with the access network equipment through the NR interface to transmit user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal equipment can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (N1 for short); access Network equipment, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (N3 for short); the access network equipment can establish a control plane signaling with the AMF through the NG interface 2 (N2 for short). connection; UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (N4 for short); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (N6 for short); AMF can communicate with SMF through NG interface 11 (N11 for short) The SMF establishes a control plane signaling connection; the SMF can establish a control plane signaling connection with the PCF through the NG interface 7 (N7 for short).
图1示例性地示出了一个基站、一个核心网设备和两个终端设备,可选地,该无线通信系统100可以包括多个基站设备并且每个基站的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。FIG. 1 exemplarily shows one base station, one core network device and two terminal devices. Optionally, the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple base station devices and the coverage area of each base station may include other numbers of terminals equipment, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应理解,本申请实施例中网络/系统中具有通信功能的设备均可称为通信设备。以图1示出的通信系统100为例,通信设备可包括具有通信功能的网络设备120和终端设备110,网络设备120和终端设备110可以为上文所述的设备,此处不再赘述;通信设备还可包括通信系统100中的其他设备,例如网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例中对此不做限定。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, a device having a communication function in the network/system can be referred to as a communication device. Taking the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 as an example, the communication device may include a network device 120 and a terminal device 110 with a communication function, and the network device 120 and the terminal device 110 may be the devices described above, which will not be repeated here; The communication device may further include other devices in the communication system 100, such as other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应理解,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably herein. The term "and/or" in this article is only an association relationship to describe the associated objects, indicating that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, it can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and A and B exist independently B these three cases. In addition, the character "/" in this document generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
本申请实施例提供了一种无线通信方法,可用于确定发送SRS的时隙。The embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method, which can be used to determine a time slot for sending an SRS.
为便于对本申请实施例的理解,下面对SRS进行介绍。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the SRS is introduced below.
探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)信号是5G/NR系统中重要的参考信号,广泛用于NR系统中的各种功能中,例如,SRS可以用于以下场景:The Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) signal is an important reference signal in the 5G/NR system and is widely used in various functions in the NR system. For example, the SRS can be used in the following scenarios:
1.用于下行信道状态信息的获取(UE sounding procedure for DL CSI acquisition)1. For the acquisition of downlink channel state information (UE sounding procedure for DL CSI acquisition)
2.用于上行传输的频域调度和预编码确定;2. Frequency domain scheduling and precoding determination for uplink transmission;
3.用于天线切换(Antenna Switching)功能;3. Used for Antenna Switching function;
4.用于载波切换(Carrier Switching)功能(UE sounding procedure between component carriers);4. Used for carrier switching (UE sounding procedure between component carriers);
5.用于定位功能;5. Used for positioning function;
6.配合基于码本(codebook-based)的上行传输;6. Cooperate with codebook-based uplink transmission;
7.配合基于非码本(Non-Codebook based)的上行传输。7. Cooperate with the uplink transmission based on non-codebook (Non-Codebook based).
网络设备可以给一个终端设备配置一个或多个SRS资源组(SRS Resource set),每个SRS Resource set可以配置1个或多个SRS resource(SRS资源)。A network device can configure one or more SRS resource groups (SRS Resource sets) for a terminal device, and each SRS Resource set can configure one or more SRS resources (SRS resources).
SRS的传输可以分为周期性(Periodic)、半持续(Semi-persistent)、非周期(Aperiodic)。The transmission of the SRS can be divided into periodic (Periodic), semi-persistent (Semi-persistent), and aperiodic (Aperiodic).
周期SRS是指周期性传输的SRS,其周期和时隙偏移由RRC信令配置,终端设备一旦接收到相应的配置参数,就按照一定的周期发送SRS,直到所述RRC配置失效。周期性SRS的空间相关信息(Spatial Relation Info)也由RRC信令配置。所述空间相关信息可以指示一个信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS),同步信号/物理广播信道块(Synchronization Signal/PBCH Block,SSB)或者参考SRS。例如,可以通过隐式的方式来指示周期SRS的发送波束。例如,终端设备根据指示的CSI-RS/SSB来确定周期SRS的发送波束。再如,终端设备可以通过SRS资源的空间相关信息确定在SRS资源上传输SRS所用的发送波束。Periodic SRS refers to periodically transmitted SRS, and its period and time slot offset are configured by RRC signaling. Once the terminal device receives the corresponding configuration parameters, it will send SRS according to a certain period until the RRC configuration is invalid. The spatial correlation information (Spatial Relation Info) of the periodic SRS is also configured by RRC signaling. The spatial correlation information may indicate a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS), a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (Synchronization Signal/PBCH Block, SSB) or a reference SRS. For example, the transmission beam of the periodic SRS may be indicated in an implicit manner. For example, the terminal device determines the transmission beam of the periodic SRS according to the indicated CSI-RS/SSB. For another example, the terminal device may determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the SRS resource through the spatial correlation information of the SRS resource.
半持续性SRS的周期和时隙偏移(slot offset)由RRC信令配置,但其激活和去激活信令是通过MAC CE承载的。终端设备在接收到激活信令后开始传输SRS,直到接收到去激活信令为止。半持续SRS的空间相关信息(发送波束)通过激活SRS的MAC CE一起承载。The period and slot offset of semi-persistent SRS are configured by RRC signaling, but its activation and deactivation signaling is carried by MAC CE. The terminal device starts to transmit SRS after receiving the activation signaling until it receives the deactivation signaling. The spatially related information (transmission beam) of the semi-persistent SRS is carried along with the MAC CE that activates the SRS.
终端设备接收到RRC配置的周期和时隙偏移后,根据以下公式确定能够用于传输SRS的时隙:After receiving the period and time slot offset configured by RRC, the terminal equipment determines the time slot that can be used to transmit SRS according to the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000001
其中,T SRS和T offset为配置的周期和偏移,n f
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000002
分别为无线帧和时隙编号。
Among them, T SRS and T offset are the configured period and offset, n f and
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000002
are the radio frame and time slot numbers, respectively.
非周期SRS传输指网络设备可以通过DCI触发终端设备的SRS传输。用于触发非周期SRS传输的触发信令既可以通过UE专属搜索空间或公共搜索空间(Common search space)中用于调度PUSCH/PDSCH的DCI承载,也可以通过公共搜索空间中的DCI format 2_3来承载。Aperiodic SRS transmission means that the network device can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device through DCI. The trigger signaling for triggering aperiodic SRS transmission can be either through the DCI bearer for scheduling PUSCH/PDSCH in the UE-specific search space or the common search space (Common search space), or through the DCI format 2_3 in the common search space. bear.
其中,DCI format 2_3不仅可以用于触发非周期SRS传输,也可以同时用于配置一组UE或一组载波上的SRS的功率控制指令(TPC)命令。Wherein, DCI format 2_3 can not only be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission, but also can be used to configure a power control command (TPC) command of SRS on a group of UEs or a group of carriers at the same time.
表1 SRS触发信令Table 1 SRS trigger signaling
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000003
例如,若DCI中的SRS请求域的值为11,则SRS的触发信令指示使用更高层参数非周期SRS资源触发(aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger)设置为3的SRS资源组进行SRS传输。For example, if the value of the SRS request field in the DCI is 11, the trigger signaling of the SRS indicates that the SRS resource group with the higher layer parameter aperiodic SRS resource trigger (aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger) set to 3 is used for SRS transmission.
终端设备接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI)后,在触发信令所指示的非周期SRS资源组上进行SRS传输。其中,触发信令与SRS传输之间的时隙偏移(slot offset)可以由高层信令(RRC)配置。网络设备预先通过高层信令指示终端设备每个SRS资源组的配置参数,包括时频资源、序列参数、功率控制参数等。另外,对于触发的SRS资源组中的每个SRS资源,终端设备还可以通过该资源的空间相关信息确定在该资源上传输SRS所用的发送波束,该空间相关信息可通过RRC配置给每个SRS资源。After receiving the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (eg DCI), the terminal device performs SRS transmission on the aperiodic SRS resource group indicated by the trigger signaling. The time slot offset (slot offset) between the trigger signaling and the SRS transmission may be configured by higher layer signaling (RRC). The network device pre-instructs the terminal device configuration parameters of each SRS resource group through high-level signaling, including time-frequency resources, sequence parameters, power control parameters, and the like. In addition, for each SRS resource in the triggered SRS resource group, the terminal device can also determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the resource through the spatial correlation information of the resource, and the spatial correlation information can be configured for each SRS through RRC resource.
在新空口(New Radio,NR)系统中,为了支持各种可能的部署场景,以及未来各种新型业务类型,系统设计非常灵活,例如,上下行的资源可以通过高层信令以及物理层信令来指示和调整。因此,针对一个时隙(slot)或一个slot上的某些符号在不同的时刻可能可以用于不同方向的传输,例如,某个时刻可以用于上行传输,某个时刻用于下行传输。In the New Radio (NR) system, in order to support various possible deployment scenarios and various new service types in the future, the system design is very flexible. For example, the uplink and downlink resources can be transmitted through high-level signaling and physical layer signaling. to indicate and adjust. Therefore, some symbols in a slot or a slot may be used for transmission in different directions at different times, for example, a certain time can be used for uplink transmission, and a certain time can be used for downlink transmission.
但是,如前所述,针对非周期探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS),其时隙偏移(slot offset)可以由高层信令配置,相当于,在RRC信令重新配置其他取值之前,每次触发信令与SRS传输之间的时隙偏移是不变的,导致用于接收触发信令的时隙和用于发送SRS的时隙相对位置是固定的,增加了限制性并降低了系统灵活性。However, as mentioned above, for the aperiodic sounding reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal, SRS), its slot offset (slot offset) can be configured by high-level signaling, which is equivalent to before the RRC signaling reconfigures other values. , the time slot offset between each trigger signaling and SRS transmission is constant, resulting in a fixed relative position between the time slot used to receive the trigger signaling and the time slot used to send the SRS, which increases the restriction and Reduced system flexibility.
例如,假设时隙偏移为k,如果要触发SRS在slot n+k上传输,那么对应的触发信令只能在slot n上发送,这就限制了发送触发信令的时机,给网络设备的调度工作增加了额外不必要的限制。For example, assuming that the time slot offset is k, if the SRS is to be triggered to transmit on slot n+k, the corresponding trigger signaling can only be sent on slot n, which limits the timing of sending trigger signaling, and gives the network device The scheduling of jobs adds additional unnecessary constraints.
再如,当某个slot,或者某个slot上某些符号被动态地从可以上行传输变成下行传输时,可能会使得某次非周期SRS无法传输。例如,若slot n+k被更改为用于下行传输,则在slot n上发送的触发SRS信令是无效的,或者不能在slot n上发送触发信令。For another example, when a certain slot, or some symbols on a certain slot are dynamically changed from uplink transmission to downlink transmission, a certain aperiodic SRS may not be transmitted. For example, if slot n+k is changed to be used for downlink transmission, the trigger SRS signaling sent on slot n is invalid, or the trigger signaling cannot be sent on slot n.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若网络设备在slot n上发送SRS触发信令,则终端设备可以在slot n+k或之后的第一个有效slot上传输SRS。通过在slot n+k或之后的第一个有效slot上传输SRS,虽然可以提高传输SRS的成功率,但效率不高,还会增加网络设备的配置和调度复杂度,主要原因在于有效slot不是固定的,需要根据相关配置或因素(例如上下行时隙配置和/或指示)来确定。In some embodiments of the present application, if the network device sends SRS trigger signaling on slot n, the terminal device can transmit SRS on slot n+k or the first valid slot after that. By transmitting SRS on slot n+k or the first effective slot after that, although the success rate of transmitting SRS can be improved, the efficiency is not high, and the configuration and scheduling complexity of network equipment will be increased. The main reason is that the effective slot is not It is fixed and needs to be determined according to related configurations or factors (eg, uplink and downlink time slot configuration and/or indication).
进一步的,本申请实施例提供了一种无线通信方法,。Further, an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,将能够或可用于传输SRS的时隙称为有效时隙(valid slot)。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, a time slot that can or can be used to transmit an SRS is referred to as a valid time slot (valid slot).
图2示出了根据本申请实施例的无线通信方法200的示意性流程图,所述方法200可以由终端设备和网络设备交互执行。图2中所示的终端设备可以是如图1所示的终端设备,图2中所示的网络设备可以是如图1所示的接入网设备。FIG. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the method 200 may be executed interactively by a terminal device and a network device. The terminal device shown in FIG. 2 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 , and the network device shown in FIG. 2 may be the access network device shown in FIG. 1 .
如图2所示,所述方法200可包括:As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include:
S210,终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。S210: The terminal device receives first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
例如,终端设备接收所述第一指示信息,并在所述第一小区上接收到所述非周期SRS触发信令后,可触发所述终端设备在所述至少一个第二小区上发送SRS。For example, after receiving the first indication information and receiving the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell, the terminal device may trigger the terminal device to send SRS on the at least one second cell.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例涉及的小区可以等同于载波。例如,小区可等同于CA场景下的成员载波(Component Carrier,CC)。换言之,所述第一指示信息可用于指示第一载波上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二载波上的SRS。此外,所述至少一个第二小区可以是一个小区,也可以是一组小区,还可以是多个小区,本申请对此不作具体限定。It should be noted that the cell involved in the embodiments of the present application may be equivalent to the carrier. For example, a cell may be equivalent to a component carrier (Component Carrier, CC) in a CA scenario. In other words, the first indication information may be used to indicate that the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first carrier is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second carrier. In addition, the at least one second cell may be a cell, a group of cells, or a plurality of cells, which is not specifically limited in this application.
例如,若所述至少一个第二小区为一个第二小区,相当于,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令可用于触发另一小区上的SRS。再如,若所述至少一个第二小区为一组小区,相当于,所述第一指示信息可用于指示所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令可用于触发一组小区上的SRS。再如,若所述至少一个第二小区为多个小区,相当于,所述第一指示信息可用于指示所述第一小区上的SRS触发命令可用于触发多个小区上的SRS。应理解,所述一组小区或所述多个小区可包括所述第一小区,也可不包括所述第一小区,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。For example, if the at least one second cell is a second cell, it is equivalent to that the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell can be used to trigger the SRS on another cell . For another example, if the at least one second cell is a group of cells, it is equivalent to that the first indication information can be used to indicate that the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell can be used to trigger the SRS on a group of cells. . For another example, if the at least one second cell is a plurality of cells, it is equivalent that the first indication information can be used to indicate that the SRS triggering command on the first cell can be used to trigger the SRS on the multiple cells. It should be understood that the group of cells or the plurality of cells may include the first cell or may not include the first cell, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
通过所述第一指示信息,使得第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,可触发终端设备在至少一个第二小区上的SRS传输,换言之,能够实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)的非周期SRS的触发传输。Through the first indication information, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device on at least one second cell, in other words, the cross-cell (or Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across carriers).
此外,避免了为每个小区仅通过自己接收的非周期SRS触发信令触发SRS,不仅能够提高触发信令的灵活性,还能够降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的资源消耗。In addition, it is avoided to trigger the SRS for each cell only through the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling received by itself, which can not only improve the flexibility of the trigger signaling, but also reduce the resource consumption of the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI).
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示在第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述第一小区或所述所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, used to trigger the first The SRS on the cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
换言之,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS,可以理解为:所述第一指示信息是针对所述第一小区或所述第一BWP配置的,且所述第一指示信息指示了所述至少一个第二小区。相当于,针对不同的小区,或者针对一个小区的不同BWP,其配置的同时激活非周期SRS的小区可以不同。由此,可以提升配置的灵活性,进而提高网络设备优化性能。In other words, the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first cell or the first BWP can be understood as: the first indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP , and the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell. Equivalently, for different cells, or for different BWPs of a cell, the cells that are configured to activate the aperiodic SRS at the same time may be different. Thereby, the flexibility of configuration can be improved, thereby improving the optimization performance of the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一触发状态,或者在第一小区或所述第一小区上的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,用于触发所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or in aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell The first trigger state is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
换言之,所述第一指示信息是针对所述第一触发状态配置的,且所述第一指示信息指示了所述至少一个第二小区。相当于,两个不同的触发状态可能可以触发不同小区上的非周期SRS传输。例如触发状态1可以触发小区0和小区1上的非周期SRS传输,触发状态2可以触发小区0,小区1和小区2上的非周期SRS传输。In other words, the first indication information is configured for the first trigger state, and the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell. Equivalently, two different trigger states may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on different cells. For example, trigger state 1 may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0 and cell 1, and trigger state 2 may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0, cell 1, and cell 2.
例如,本申请实施例中涉及的第一指示信息可以使针对终端设备配置的。换言之,所述第一指示信息是针对终端设备的触发状态配置的。即第一指示信息指示的第一触发状态与至少一个第二小区的对应关系适用于所述终端设备的各个小区,或者适用于所述终端设备的各个小区的各个BWP。For example, the first indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for a terminal device. In other words, the first indication information is configured for the trigger state of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between the first trigger state indicated by the first indication information and the at least one second cell is applicable to each cell of the terminal device, or to each BWP of each cell of the terminal device.
例如,本申请实施例中涉及的第一指示信息可以使针对终端设备的一个目标小区组(Cell group)配置的。换言之,所述第一指示信息是针对终端设备的一个目标小区组上的触发状态配置的。即第一指示信息指示的第一触发状态与至少一个第二小区的对应关系适用于所述一个目标小区组的各个小区,或者适用于所述一个目标小区组的各个小区的各个BWP。For example, the first indication information involved in the embodiments of the present application may be configured for a target cell group (Cell group) of the terminal device. In other words, the first indication information is configured for a trigger state on a target cell group of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between the first trigger state indicated by the first indication information and the at least one second cell is applicable to each cell of the one target cell group, or to each BWP of each cell of the one target cell group.
需要说明的是,所述目标小区组可以指双连接(Dual Connection,DC)下的小区组。例如主小区组(MCG,Master Cell group),或者辅小区组(SCG,Secondary Cell group)。而本申请中涉及的至少一个第二小区或至少一个第三小区形成的小区组均可以理解为一个非周期SRS触发信令可触发的一个或多个小区所形成的小区组;例如,下文涉及的第一小区组、第二小区组、第一指示信息指示的小区组、或第二信息指示的小区组。It should be noted that the target cell group may refer to a cell group under a dual connection (Dual Connection, DC). For example, a master cell group (MCG, Master Cell group), or a secondary cell group (SCG, Secondary Cell group). However, the cell group formed by at least one second cell or at least one third cell involved in this application can be understood as a cell group formed by one or more cells that can be triggered by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling; The first cell group, the second cell group, the cell group indicated by the first indication information, or the cell group indicated by the second information.
可选的,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。Optionally, the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过第一无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)信令承载,所述第一RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is carried by first radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling, and the first RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;或Bandwidth Partial Shared Uplink BWP-UplinkCommon; or
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated。The bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示在终端设备的所述第一小区或小区组(Cell Group)的所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述终端设备或所述小区组对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell of the terminal device or the first cell of the cell group (Cell Group), using for triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the cell group.
换言之,所述第一指示信息是针对所述终端设备或包括所述第一小区的小区组配置的,且所述第一指示信息指示了所述至少一个第二小区。相当于,针对不同的小区,或者同一个小区组中的不同小区,其配置的同时激活非周期SRS的小区可以是相同的。由此,网络设备和终端设备实现和处理简单,可以降低实现复杂度。In other words, the first indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, and the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell. Equivalently, for different cells or different cells in the same cell group, the cells that are configured to activate the aperiodic SRS at the same time may be the same. Therefore, the network device and the terminal device are simple to implement and process, and the implementation complexity can be reduced.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过第二无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第二RRC信令通过小区组配置CellGroupConfig配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is carried through the second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured through the cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第二小区,其中,在所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used for Triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell.
换言之,所述第一指示信息通过RRC中的指示域指示第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In other words, the first indication information indicates that the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell through the indication field in the RRC.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第二小区为所属终端设备的所有活跃小区,或所述至少一个第二小区为所属终端设备对应小区组的所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one second cell is all active cells of the terminal equipment to which it belongs, or the at least one second cell is the terminal to which it belongs The device corresponds to all active cells of the cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区组中所有活跃小区。可选的,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group. Optionally, the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区和第一小区组中的所有活跃小区。可选的,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is the first cell and all active cells in the first cell group. Optionally, the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域未配置,或者配置为特定的取值,则所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区,即同一个小区上的非周期SRS触发信令只触发本小区上的非周期SRS传输。In some embodiments of the present application, if the indication field is not configured, or is configured with a specific value, the at least one second cell is the first cell, that is, an aperiodic SRS trigger on the same cell The signaling only triggers aperiodic SRS transmission on the local cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第一小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
应理解,所述小区标识也可称为小区编码,本申请对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that the cell identifier may also be referred to as a cell code, which is not specifically limited in this application.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the method 200 may further include:
接收第三RRC信令,所述第三RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区。Receive third RRC signaling, where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
例如,终端设备接收网络设备发送的所述第三RRC信令。For example, the terminal device receives the third RRC signaling sent by the network device.
换言之,网络设备向终端设备发送所述第三RRC信令,以配置所述至少一个小区。In other words, the network device sends the third RRC signaling to the terminal device to configure the at least one cell.
需要说明的是,针对SRS,需要基于SRS资源组(SRS-ResourceSet)或SRS资源(SRS-Resource)进行传输。换言之,终端设备发送的SRS可以是SRS资源组或SRS资源对应的SRS。SRS资源组对应的SRS的时隙偏移是针对SRS资源组配置的,SRS资源对应的时隙偏移是针对SRS资源配置的。上述介绍的SRS资源组对应的SRS也可以称为普通SRS。可选的,SRS资源组中的用途(usage)域可配置为波束管理(beamManagement),码本(codebook),非码本(nonCodebook),天线切换(antennaSwitching)中的一个。SRS资源对应的SRS也可以为用于定位的SRS,通过RRC信令SRS-PosResource-r16配置,对应的SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-PosResourceSet-r16配置。后面为了描述简单,部分地方只以普通SRS为例来介绍,但是其方案同样适用于定位SRS。It should be noted that, for SRS, transmission needs to be performed based on an SRS resource group (SRS-ResourceSet) or an SRS resource (SRS-Resource). In other words, the SRS sent by the terminal device may be an SRS resource group or an SRS corresponding to an SRS resource. The slot offset of the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group is configured for the SRS resource group, and the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource is configured for the SRS resource. The SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group introduced above may also be referred to as a common SRS. Optionally, the usage field in the SRS resource group may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching). The SRS corresponding to the SRS resource may also be an SRS used for positioning, which is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16, and the corresponding SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16. In order to simplify the description later, only ordinary SRS is used as an example for introduction in some places, but the solution is also applicable to positioning SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell The resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
需要说明的是,本申请各个实施例涉及的SRS资源组均为非周期SRS资源组,SRS资源均为非周期SRS资源。It should be noted that the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
例如,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。For example, the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, through the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
例如,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。For example, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is from 1 to N-1 the integer.
例如,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。For example, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method 200 may further include:
基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS The time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
在所述一个第二小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one second cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell The offset k is the activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
例如,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。For example, the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
再如,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。For another example, the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
需要说明的是,本申请各个实施例涉及的SRS资源组均为非周期SRS资源组,SRS资源均为非周期SRS资源。It should be noted that the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
例如,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。For example, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, through the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
例如,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。For example, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
例如,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。For example, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the method 200 may further include:
基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
在所述一个第二小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one second cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one second cell The corresponding slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
例如,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。For example, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
再如,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。For another example, the third time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
需要说明的是,所述有效时隙也可以理解为可用于上行传输的时隙。所述可用于上行传输的时隙可以理解为仅用于上行传输的时隙,即一直用于上行传输,也可理解为含有上行符号(uplink symbol)的时隙,也可理解为含有灵活符号(flexible symbol)的时隙,也可以理解为灵活时隙(flexible slot),也可以理解为偶尔不可用于上行传输的时隙,例如,偶尔用于下行传输的时隙。可选的,本申请中的可用于上行传输的时隙实际能不能用于上行传输,需要看是否与其他信号发送碰撞。It should be noted that, the valid time slot may also be understood as a time slot available for uplink transmission. The time slot that can be used for uplink transmission can be understood as a time slot only used for uplink transmission, that is, it is always used for uplink transmission, it can also be understood as a time slot containing an uplink symbol (uplink symbol), and it can also be understood as a time slot containing flexible symbols. The time slot of (flexible symbol) can also be understood as a flexible time slot (flexible slot), and it can also be understood as a time slot that is occasionally unavailable for uplink transmission, for example, a time slot that is occasionally used for downlink transmission. Optionally, whether the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission in this application can actually be used for uplink transmission depends on whether it collides with other signal transmissions.
下面结合具体实施例对所述方法200的技术方案进行说明。需要说明,后续实施例中,步骤主要是为了描述相对关联的功能点,在实际实施时,部分步骤可以省略,或者不同步骤的相对顺序可以改变,或者不同步骤中的不同子过程的相对顺序可以改变,在此不做限定。The technical solution of the method 200 will be described below with reference to specific embodiments. It should be noted that in the subsequent embodiments, the steps are mainly used to describe relatively related function points. In actual implementation, some steps may be omitted, or the relative order of different steps may be changed, or the relative order of different sub-processes in different steps may be Changes are not limited here.
实施例1:Example 1:
本实施例中,所述第一指示信息是针对所述第一小区或所述第一BWP配置的。In this embodiment, the first indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
例如,小区聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)配置信息。其中配置有A个小区。针对A个小区中的1个或多个(记为B,B<=A)中的每一个小区(部分情况下,可能有的小区不配置对应的非周期SRS,因此写成A中的1个或多个),网络设备通过RRC信令携带SRS配置信息,配置1个或多个SRS资源组,每个SRS资源组包含1个或多个SRS资源。下面描述是针对B个小区中的某个小区进行描述,不同小区上的配置可以独立。下面以小区Z为例来描述。For example, cell aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) configuration information. A cells are configured therein. For each cell in one or more of the A cells (denoted as B, B<=A) (in some cases, some cells may not be configured with the corresponding aperiodic SRS, so it is written as one of A or more), the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources. The following description is for a certain cell in the B cells, and the configurations on different cells may be independent. The following description takes the cell Z as an example.
可选的,小区Z上所述SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-ResourceSet配置,所述SRS资源通过RRC信令SRS-Resource配置。Optionally, the SRS resource group on cell Z is configured through RRC signaling SRS-ResourceSet, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-Resource.
可选的,SRS-ResourceSet信令中的用途(usage)域可配置为波束管理(beamManagement),码本(codebook),非码本(nonCodebook),天线切换(antennaSwitching)中的一个。Optionally, the usage field in the SRS-ResourceSet signaling may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
可选的,小区Z上所述SRS资源组配置有多个(记为M个,M>=1)触发状态。可选的,每个触发状态对应非周期SRS触发信令中SRS请求域的一个取值,即一个码点(code point)。例如表1的触发状态的取值。Optionally, the SRS resource group on the cell Z is configured with multiple (denoted as M, M>=1) trigger states. Optionally, each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point. For example, the value of the trigger state in Table 1.
可选的,上述多个触发状态通过SRS-ResourceSet IE中的aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList来配置,其中aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger配置1个值,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置1个或多个值。Optionally, the above multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList in the SRS-ResourceSet IE, where aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is configured with one value, and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is configured with one or more values.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger取值范围为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
例如,N可以等于非周期SRS触发状态数目(maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates),取值为4。For example, N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
再如,根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定N的取值为4或更大值(例如,8或16);当然,在其他可替代实施例中,可采用其他命名。通过增加非周期SRS触发信令所对应的状态数,可以提高DCI触发非周期SRS的灵活性,提高系统性能,从而可以实现跨小区触发非周期SRS,降低DCI开销,增加系统灵活性。可选的,所述配置信息通过RRC信令,或者MAC CE信令指示终端设备。可选的,终端设备通过终端设备能力上报信息通知网络设备可以支持更多的非周期SRS触发状态(Maximum number of SRS trigger states),即N大于4,以便网络设备基于终端设备上报的能力确定N。For another example, the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used. By increasing the number of states corresponding to aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, the flexibility of DCI triggering aperiodic SRS can be improved, and system performance can be improved, thereby enabling cross-cell triggering of aperiodic SRS, reducing DCI overhead, and increasing system flexibility. Optionally, the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling. Optionally, the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
可选的,所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置。Optionally, the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上传输的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的SRS。For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells can trigger the SRS on the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备当前所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区 配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。基于此,不仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销。相当于,终端设备在一个小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,同一个信令可以触发所有小区上的非周期SRS传输。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z triggers all current The corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on the active cell. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
选项2:Option 2:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, cell Z or aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the BWP Y of cell Z Aperiodic SRS transmissions corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells are triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。此外,触发小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y对应的非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。和选项2相比,针对选项2,只有在指示域指示的一组小区中包括小区Z的情况下,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令才可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;选项3在2基础上,无论指示域指示的一组小区中是否包括小区Z,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;相当于,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, cell Z or aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the BWP Y of cell Z Aperiodic SRS transmissions corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells are triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z is triggered. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance. Compared with option 2, for option 2, aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;或The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置。The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触发状态大于0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as value for short). is the first value), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
针对上述确定的小区中的每一个小区上(记为Z’),发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源组配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移。For each cell in the above determined cells (denoted as Z'), the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value. The corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源所在的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z’对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
例如,可采用如下公式确定slot n’:For example, slot n’ can be determined using the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000004
其中,所述u SRS表示所述SRS对应的子载波间隔配置,所述u PDCCH表示所述触发信令使用的物理下行控制信道PDCCH对应的子载波间隔配置,所述k表示SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移,所述n表示所述第一时隙。 Wherein, the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS, the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling, and the k represents the corresponding SRS resource group. slot offset, where n represents the first slot.
再如,可以基于以下公式确定slot n’:As another example, slot n’ can be determined based on the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000005
其中,所述u SRS表示所述SRS对应的子载波间隔配置,所述u PDCCH表示所述触发信令使用的物理下行控制信道PDCCH对应的子载波间隔配置,所述
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000006
和所述u offset,PDCCH分别是取决于上层配置的用于接收物理下行控制信道PDCCH的针对载波聚合CA的时隙偏移的
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000007
和u offset,所述
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000008
和所述u offset,SRS分别是取决于上层配置的用于传输所述SRS的针对载波聚合CA的时隙偏移的
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000009
和u offset,所述k表示SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移,所述n表示所述第一时隙。此外,
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000010
和u offset可以是通信标准中规定的针对CA的时隙偏移的相关参数。
Wherein, the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS, the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling, and the
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000006
and the u offset, PDCCH respectively depends on the time slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for receiving the physical downlink control channel PDCCH
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000007
and u offset , the
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000008
and the u offset, the SRS respectively depends on the slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for transmitting the SRS
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000009
and u offset , the k represents the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group, and the n represents the first slot. also,
Figure PCTCN2020117817-appb-000010
and u offset may be the relevant parameters of the slot offset for CA specified in the communication standard.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
下面对选项1中的预设值进行示例性说明。The preset value in option 1 is exemplified below.
例如,针对选项1的一个RRC信令中的指示域的示例可以通过如下方式设置。当然,命名和位置仅是本申请的示例,本申请对此不作具体限定。For example, an example of an indication field in an RRC signaling for option 1 can be set as follows. Of course, the names and positions are only examples of the present application, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
例如,假设指示域的预设值可设置为{FALSE,TRUE};若配置有指示域,且该指示域的值为FALSE,使用原有触发方式,即只在非周期SRS触发信令对应的小区Z上触发对应的非周期SRS;若该指示域的值为TRUE,使用本申请提供的触发方式。For example, it is assumed that the preset value of the indication field can be set to {FALSE, TRUE}; if an indication field is configured, and the value of the indication field is FALSE, the original triggering method is used, that is, only in the corresponding aperiodic SRS trigger signaling The corresponding aperiodic SRS is triggered on cell Z; if the value of the indication field is TRUE, the triggering method provided by this application is used.
再如,假设指示域的预设值可设置为{TRUE};若未配置该指示域,使用原有触发方式,即只在非周期SRS触发信令对应的小区Z上触发对应的非周期SRS;若配置有该指示域,使用本申请提供的触发方式。For another example, it is assumed that the preset value of the indication field can be set to {TRUE}; if the indication field is not configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. ; If this indication field is configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
再如,假设指示域的预设值可设置为{FALSE};若配置有该指示域,使用原有触发方式,即只在非周期SRS触发信令对应的小区Z上触发对应的非周期SRS;若未配置有该指示域,使用本申请提供的触发方式。For another example, it is assumed that the preset value of the indication field can be set to {FALSE}; if the indication field is configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling ; If this indication field is not configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
再如,假设指示域的预设值可设置为{Enable,Disable};若配置有指示域,且该指示域的值为Disable,使用原有触发方式,即只在非周期SRS触发信令对应的小区Z上触发对应的非周期SRS;若该指示域的值为Enable使用本申请提供的触发方式。For another example, it is assumed that the preset value of the indication field can be set to {Enable, Disable}; if an indication field is configured, and the value of the indication field is Disable, the original triggering method is used, that is, it is only corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. The corresponding aperiodic SRS is triggered on the cell Z of the specified field; if the value of the indication field is Enable, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
再如,假设指示域的预设值可设置为{Enable};若未配置该指示域,使用原有触发方式,即只在非周期SRS触发信令对应的小区Z上触发对应的非周期SRS;若配置有该指示域,使用本申请提供的触发方式。For another example, it is assumed that the preset value of the indication field can be set to {Enable}; if the indication field is not configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. ; If this indication field is configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
再如,假设指示域的预设值可设置为{Disable};若配置有该指示域,使用原有触发方式,即只在非周期SRS触发信令对应的小区Z上触发对应的非周期SRS;若未配置有该指示域,使用本申请提供的触发方式。For another example, it is assumed that the preset value of the indication field can be set to {Disable}; if the indication field is configured, the original triggering method is used, that is, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is only triggered on the cell Z corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. ; If this indication field is not configured, the triggering method provided in this application is used.
下面对用于配置RRC信令进行示例性说明。An exemplary description is given below for configuring RRC signaling.
针对选项1的一个RRC信令的示例,指示域可以是用于承载预设值的域。例如,可以通过SRS-Config或ServingCellConfig配置。当然,命名和位置仅是本申请的示例,本申请对此不作具体限定。For an example of RRC signaling of option 1, the indication field may be a field for carrying a preset value. For example, it can be configured through SRS-Config or ServingCellConfig. Of course, the names and positions are only examples of the present application, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
针对选项2和选项3的一个RRC信令示例,可以通过“BIT STRING(SIZE(T))”格式中的数值来配置,其中SIZE(T)中的T为一个正整数,表示一共多少个bit。例如,可以通过SRS-Config、UplinkConfig或ServingCellConfig配置。当然,命名和位置仅是本申请的示例,本申请对此不作具体限定。An example of RRC signaling for option 2 and option 3 can be configured by the value in the "BIT STRING(SIZE(T))" format, where T in SIZE(T) is a positive integer, indicating how many bits in total . For example, it can be configured through SRS-Config, UplinkConfig or ServingCellConfig. Of course, the names and positions are only examples of the present application, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
需要说明的是,SRS-Config,UplinkConfig,ServingCellConfig仅为本申请中用于配置RRC信令的配置的示例,不应理解为对本申请的限制。例如,在其他可替代实施例中,也可以通过其他参数配置RRC信令。It should be noted that SRS-Config, UplinkConfig, and ServingCellConfig are only examples of configurations for configuring RRC signaling in this application, and should not be construed as limitations on this application. For example, in other alternative embodiments, the RRC signaling may also be configured through other parameters.
例如,BWP-Uplink,BWP-UplinkCommon,BWP-UplinkDedicated,ServingCellConfigCommon,SpCellConfig,或SCellConfig。For example, BWP-Uplink, BWP-UplinkCommon, BWP-UplinkDedicated, ServingCellConfigCommon, SpCellConfig, or SCellConfig.
实施例2:Example 2:
本实施例中,所述第一指示信息是针对非周期SRS触发状态配置的。In this embodiment, the first indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
应理解,实施例2中的步骤1可参考实施例1中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for step 1 in Embodiment 2, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上非周期SRS触发状态S可以触发1个或多个小区上的SRS。当小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上非周期SRS触发信令对应非周期SRS触发状态S时,则触发所述1个或多个小区上的SRS。For cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information that the aperiodic SRS trigger state S on cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z can trigger SRS on one or more cells. When the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z corresponds to the aperiodic SRS trigger state S, the SRS on the one or more cells is triggered.
可选的,上述非周期SRS触发状态S为非0的状态。Optionally, the aperiodic SRS triggering state S is a non-zero state.
可选的,针对不同的非周期SRS触发状态可以配置对应的不同小区。Optionally, corresponding different cells may be configured for different aperiodic SRS triggering states.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令对应的触发状态S只触 发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate relevant information through the above signaling, the trigger state S corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
针对非零非周期SRS触发状态S,网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令,若此非零非周期触发信令对应触发状态为S时,触发终端设备当前所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。基于此,不仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销。相当于,终端设备在一个小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,同一个信令可以触发所有小区上的非周期SRS传输。For the non-zero aperiodic SRS triggering state S, the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on the cell Z, If the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells of the terminal device is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
选项2:Option 2:
针对非零非周期SRS触发状态S,网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令,若此非零非周期触发信令对应触发状态为S时,触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。For the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S, the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic data sent on the cell Z SRS trigger signaling, if the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
针对非零非周期SRS触发状态S,网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,网络设备在小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令,若此非零非周期触发信令对应触发状态为S时,触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。此外,触发小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y对应的非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。和选项2相比,针对选项2,只有在指示域指示的一组小区中包括小区Z的情况下,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令才可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;选项3在2基础上,无论指示域指示的一组小区中是否包括小区Z,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;相当于,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。For the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S, the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, and the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the network device sends the data on cell Z. If the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z is triggered. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance. Compared with option 2, for option 2, aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置。The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在小区Z上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触发状态S>0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z, and the trigger state S>0 corresponding to the first signaling (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) ), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
针对第一信令对应的触发状态S,确定上述对应的小区中的每一个小区上(记为Z’),发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源组配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移。For the trigger state S corresponding to the first signaling, it is determined that in each of the above-mentioned corresponding cells (marked as Z'), the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value value of the first signaling is sent. A trigger state is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z', so there is an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value on each Z'. The corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源所在的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z’对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移offset(数值用k表示,这种方式对应额SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移,或者激活一个时隙偏移的情况),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset offset corresponding to the SRS resource group (the value is represented by k, this way corresponds to the case of configuring a time slot offset for the SRS resource group, or activating a time slot offset), or the MAC The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group activated by the signaling (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time corresponding to the SRS resource group indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling The slot offset k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
实施例3:Example 3:
本实施例中,所述第一指示信息是针对所述终端设备或包括所述第一小区的小区组配置的,即上文所述的目标小区组。In this embodiment, the first indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, that is, the target cell group described above.
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
应理解,实施例3中的步骤1可参考实施例1中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for step 1 in Embodiment 3, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对终端设备,或者针对一个目标小区组,网络设备通过第一指示信息指示非周期SRS触发信令可以触发终端设备的哪些小区上的SRS,或者可以触发所述目标小区组对应的哪些小区上的SRS。在实施例1中,通过信令指示在小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输。和实施例1相比,网络设备和终端设备实现和处理简单,降低实现复杂度。For a terminal device or a target cell group, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells on which the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling can trigger the SRS on the terminal device, or on which cells corresponding to the target cell group can trigger the SRS. SRS. In Embodiment 1, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on cell Z is used to indicate which cells can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on which cells. Compared with Embodiment 1, the implementation and processing of network equipment and terminal equipment are simple, and the implementation complexity is reduced.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate the relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则终端设备小区Z上,或者所述小区组中的任一小区Z上,发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备当前所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。基于此,不仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销。相当于,终端设备在一个小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,同一个信令可以触发所有小区上的非周期SRS传输。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the terminal equipment cell Z, or any cell Z in the cell group, sends a non- The periodic SRS triggering signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all currently active cells of the terminal device. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
选项2:Option 2:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备小区Z上,或者所述小区组中的任一小区Z上,发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group. On Z, the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备小区Z上,或者所述小区组中的任一小区Z上,发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。此外,触发小区Z对应的非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。和选项2相比,针对选项2,只有在指示域指示的一组小区中包括小区Z的情况下,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令才可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;选项3在2基础上,无论指示域指示的一组小区中是否包括小区Z,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;相当于,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group. On Z, the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance. Compared with option 2, for option 2, aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过CellGroupConfig配置。Optionally, the RRC signaling may be configured through CellGroupConfig.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在小区Z上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的取值大于0(取值记为value),则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value is recorded as value), then on the previously determined cell The corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent.
针对上述确定的小区中的每一个小区上(记为Z’),发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非 周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源组配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移。For each cell in the above determined cells (denoted as Z'), the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value. The corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源所在的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源Optionally, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of cell Z, and the terminal device determines the slot corresponding to cell Z according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. Transmission of SRS resources on n'
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
上面结合实施例1至实施例3对第一指示信息用于触发SRS资源组对应的SRS的方案进行了说明,下面结合实施例4至实施例6对所述第一指示信息用于触发SRS资源对应的SRS进行说明。The solution in which the first indication information is used to trigger the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group has been described above with reference to Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 3. The following describes the first indication information used to trigger the SRS resource in combination with Embodiment 4 to Embodiment 6. The corresponding SRS is described.
实施例4:Example 4:
本实施例中,所述第一指示信息是针对所述第一小区或所述第一BWP配置的。In this embodiment, the first indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
例如,小区聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)配置信息。其中配置有A个小区。针对A个小区中的1个或多个(记为B,B<=A)中的每一个小区(部分情况下,可能有的小区不配置对应的非周期SRS,因此写成A中的1个或多个),网络设备通过RRC信令携带SRS配置信息,配置1个或多个SRS资源组,每个SRS资源组包含1个或多个SRS资源。下面描述是针对B个小区中的某个小区进行描述,不同小区上的配置可以独立。下面以小区Z为例来描述。For example, cell aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) configuration information. A cells are configured therein. For each cell in one or more of the A cells (denoted as B, B<=A) (in some cases, some cells may not be configured with the corresponding aperiodic SRS, so it is written as one of A or more), the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources. The following description is for a certain cell in the B cells, and the configurations on different cells may be independent. The following description takes the cell Z as an example.
可选的,所述SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-PosResourceSet-r16配置,所述SRS资源通过RRC信令SRS-PosResource-r16配置。Optionally, the SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16.
可选的,针对至少一个所述SRS资源组(记为Set X)配置有多个(记为M个,M>=1)触发状态。可选的,每个触发状态对应非周期SRS触发信令中SRS请求域的一个取值,即一个码点(code point)。例如表1的触发状态的取值。Optionally, at least one of the SRS resource groups (denoted as Set X) is configured with multiple (denoted as M, M>=1) trigger states. Optionally, each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point. For example, the value of the trigger state in Table 1.
可选的,多个触发状态通过SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16来配置。Optionally, multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 in SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16中每个元素的取值为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
例如,N可以等于非周期SRS触发状态数目(maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates),取值为4。For example, N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
再如,根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定N的取值为4或更大值(例如,8或16);当然,在其他可替代实施例中,可采用其他命名。通过增加非周期SRS触发信令所对应的状态数,可以提高DCI触发非周期SRS的灵活性,提高系统性能,从而可以实现跨小区触发非周期SRS,降低DCI开销,增加系统灵活性。For another example, the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used. By increasing the number of states corresponding to aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, the flexibility of DCI triggering aperiodic SRS can be improved, and system performance can be improved, thereby enabling cross-cell triggering of aperiodic SRS, reducing DCI overhead, and increasing system flexibility.
可选的,所述配置信息通过RRC信令,或者MAC CE信令指示终端设备。Optionally, the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
可选的,终端设备通过终端设备能力上报信息通知网络设备可以支持更多的非周期SRS触发状态(Maximum number of SRS trigger states),即N大于4,以便网络设备基于终端设备上报的能力确定N。Optionally, the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device can determine N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
可选的,所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置Optionally, the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config
步骤2:Step 2:
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上传输的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的SRS。For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells can trigger the SRS on the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate the relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备当前所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。基于此,不仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销。相当于,终端设备在一个小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,同一个信令可以触发所有小区上的非周期SRS传输。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z triggers the corresponding non-periodic SRS on all currently active cells of the terminal equipment. Periodic SRS transmission. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
选项2:Option 2:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z triggers the terminal equipment in the Corresponding aperiodic SRS transmissions on all active cells in a set of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。此外,触发小区Z对应的非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。和选项2相比,针对选项2,只有在指示域指示的一组小区中包括小区Z的情况下,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令才可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;选项3在2基础上,无论指示域指示的一组小区中是否包括小区Z,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;相当于,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z triggers the terminal equipment in the Corresponding aperiodic SRS transmissions on all active cells in a set of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance. Compared with option 2, for option 2, aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;或The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置。The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在小区Z上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触发状态大于0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) , that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
针对上述确定的小区中的每一个小区上(记为Z’),发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移For each cell in the above determined cells (denoted as Z'), the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value. The corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z’对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource. SRS resources.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
实施例5:Example 5:
本实施例中,所述第一指示信息是针对非周期SRS触发状态配置的。In this embodiment, the first indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
应理解,实施例5中的步骤1可参考实施例3中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for step 1 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上非周期SRS触发状态S可以触发1个或多个小区上的SRS。当小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上非周期SRS触发信令对应非周期SRS触发状态S时,则触发所述1个或多个小区上的SRS。For cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information that the aperiodic SRS trigger state S on cell Z or BWP Y of cell Z can trigger SRS on one or more cells. When the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z corresponds to the aperiodic SRS trigger state S, the SRS on the one or more cells is triggered.
可选的,上述非周期SRS触发状态S为非0的状态。Optionally, the aperiodic SRS triggering state S is a non-zero state.
可选的,针对不同的非周期SRS触发状态S可以配置对应的不同小区。Optionally, corresponding different cells may be configured for different aperiodic SRS trigger states S.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令对应的触发状态S只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate relevant information through the above signaling, the trigger state S corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
针对非零非周期SRS触发状态S,网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令,若此非零非周期触发信令对应触发状态为S时,触发终端设备当前所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。基于此,不 仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销。相当于,终端设备在一个小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,同一个信令可以触发所有小区上的非周期SRS传输。For the non-zero aperiodic SRS triggering state S, the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on the cell Z, If the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells of the terminal device is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
选项2:Option 2:
针对非零非周期SRS触发状态S,网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令,若此非零非周期触发信令对应触发状态为S时,触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。For the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S, the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic data sent on the cell Z SRS trigger signaling, if the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
针对非零非周期SRS触发状态S,网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令,若此非零非周期触发信令对应触发状态为S时,触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。此外,触发小区Z对应的非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。和选项2相比,针对选项2,只有在指示域指示的一组小区中包括小区Z的情况下,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令才可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;选项3在2基础上,无论指示域指示的一组小区中是否包括小区Z,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;相当于,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。For the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S, the network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, the group of cells includes one or more cells, and the aperiodic data sent on the cell Z SRS trigger signaling, if the trigger state corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic trigger signaling is S, the aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells is triggered. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance. Compared with option 2, for option 2, aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;或The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置。The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在小区Z上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触发状态S>0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z, and the trigger state S>0 corresponding to the first signaling (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) ), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
针对第一信令对应的触发状态S,确定上述对应的小区中的每一个小区上(记为Z’),发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移For the trigger state S corresponding to the first signaling, it is determined that in each of the above-mentioned corresponding cells (marked as Z'), the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value value of the first signaling is sent. A trigger state is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z', so there is an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value on each Z'. The corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z’对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource. SRS resources.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
实施例6:Example 6:
本实施例中,所述第一指示信息是针对所述终端设备或包括所述第一小区的小区组配置的,即上文所述的目标小区组。In this embodiment, the first indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, that is, the target cell group described above.
步骤1:step 1:
应理解,实施例5中的步骤1可参考实施例3中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for step 1 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对终端设备,或者针对一个目标小区组,网络设备通过第一指示信息指示非周期SRS触发信令可以触发终端设备的哪些小区上的SRS,或者可以触发所述目标小区组对应的哪些小区上的SRS。在实施例1中,通过信令指示在小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输。和实施例1相比,网络设备和终端设备实现和处理简单,降低实现复杂度。For a terminal device, or for a target cell group, the network device indicates through the first indication information which cells on which the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling can trigger the SRS on the terminal device, or on which cells corresponding to the target cell group can trigger the SRS. SRS. In Embodiment 1, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling sent on cell Z is used to indicate which cells can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on which cells. Compared with Embodiment 1, the implementation and processing of network equipment and terminal equipment are simple, and the implementation complexity is reduced.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate the relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则终端设备小区Z上,或者所述小区组中的任一小区Z上,发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备当前所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。基于此,不仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销。相当于,终端设备在一个小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,同一个信令可以触发所有小区上的非周期SRS传输。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling. If the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the terminal equipment cell Z, or any cell Z in the cell group, sends a non- The periodic SRS triggering signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission on all currently active cells of the terminal device. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. Equivalently, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling in one cell, and the same signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission in all cells.
选项2:Option 2:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备小区Z上,或者所述小区组中的任一小区Z上,发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group. On Z, the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备小区Z上,或者所述小区组中的任一小区Z上,发送的非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上对应的非周期SRS传输。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。此外,触发小区Z对应的非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发哪些小区上的非周期SRS传输,而不是触发所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输,不仅能够提升网络设备触发SRS的灵活度,还能够提高系统性能。和选项2相比,针对选项2,只有在指示域指示的一组小区中包括小区Z的情况下,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令才可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;选项3在2基础上,无论指示域指示的一组小区中是否包括小区Z,小区Z上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输;相当于,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment is on cell Z, or any cell in the cell group. On Z, the sent aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the corresponding aperiodic SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on all active cells in the group of cells. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. In addition, aperiodic SRS transmission corresponding to cell Z is triggered. Compared with option 1, it can more flexibly control which cells can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of triggering aperiodic SRS transmission on all active cells, which can not only improve the ability of network equipment to trigger SRS. flexibility, but also to improve system performance. Compared with option 2, for option 2, aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on cell Z can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z only if the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z; option 3 On the basis of 2, regardless of whether the group of cells indicated by the indication field includes cell Z, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z; equivalently, the indication field can The indication to cell Z is reduced, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过CellGroupConfig配置。Optionally, the RRC signaling may be configured through CellGroupConfig.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在小区Z上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的取值大于0(取值记为value),则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value is recorded as value), then on the previously determined cell The corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent.
针对上述确定的小区中的每一个小区上(记为Z’),发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移For each cell in the above determined cells (denoted as Z'), the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling is sent, because it is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' There is a trigger state, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value. The corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z’对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource. SRS resources.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
图3示出了根据本申请实施例的无线通信方法300的示意性流程图,所述方法300可以由终端设备和网络设备交互执行。图3中所示的终端设备可以是如图1所示的终端设备,图3中所示的网络设备可以是如图1所示的接入网设备。FIG. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 300 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the method 300 may be executed interactively by a terminal device and a network device. The terminal device shown in FIG. 3 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 , and the network device shown in FIG. 3 may be the access network device shown in FIG. 1 .
如图3所示,所述方法300可包括:As shown in FIG. 3, the method 300 may include:
S310,接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。S310. Receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
例如,终端设备接收所述第二指示信息,并在所述至少一个第三小区上的任意小区上接收到所述非周期SRS触发信令后,可触发所述终端设备在所述第一小区上发送SRS。For example, after the terminal device receives the second indication information and receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on any cell in the at least one third cell, the terminal device can trigger the terminal device in the first cell Send SRS on it.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例涉及的小区可以等同于载波。例如,小区可等同于CA场景下的成员载波(Component Carrier,CC)。换言之,所述第二指示信息可用于指示第一载波上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三载波上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。此外,所述至少一个第三小区可以是一个小区,也可以是一组小区,还可以是多个小区,本申请对此不作具体限定。It should be noted that the cell involved in the embodiments of the present application may be equivalent to the carrier. For example, a cell may be equivalent to a component carrier (Component Carrier, CC) in a CA scenario. In other words, the second indication information can be used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first carrier can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third carrier. In addition, the at least one third cell may be a cell, a group of cells, or a plurality of cells, which is not specifically limited in this application.
例如,若所述至少一个第三小区为一个第三小区,相当于,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一小区上的SRS可通过另一个小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。再如,若所述至少一个第三小区为一组小区,相当于,所述第二指示信息可用于指示所述第一小区上的SRS可通过一组小区中任意小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。再如,若所述至少一个第三小区为多个小区,相当于,所述第一指示信息可用于指示所述第一小区上的SRS可通过所述多个小区中的任意小区上的SRS触发命令触发。应理解,所述一组小区或所述多个小区可包括所述第一小区,也可不包括所述第一小区,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。For example, if the at least one third cell is a third cell, equivalently, the second indication information is used to indicate that the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on another cell . For another example, if the at least one third cell is a group of cells, it is equivalent to that the second indication information can be used to indicate that the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS on any cell in the group of cells. signaling trigger. For another example, if the at least one third cell is a plurality of cells, it is equivalent to that the first indication information can be used to indicate that the SRS on the first cell can pass the SRS on any cell in the plurality of cells. Trigger command trigger. It should be understood that the group of cells or the plurality of cells may include the first cell or may not include the first cell, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
通过所述第二指示信息,使得第一小区上的SRS,可通过所述至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发命令触发,换言之,能够实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)的非周期SRS的触发传输。Through the second indication information, the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS triggering command on the at least one third cell, in other words, the cross-cell (or cross-carrier) can be realized in the multi-cell scenario. ) trigger transmission of aperiodic SRS.
应理解,所述至少一个第三小区可以和上文涉及的至少一个第二小区相同,也可以不相同,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that the at least one third cell may be the same as or different from the at least one second cell mentioned above, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过第四无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第四RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information is carried through fourth radio resource control RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured through any one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet。SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第三小区,其中,在所述至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述第一小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
换言之,所述第二指示信息通过RRC中的指示域指示所述第一小区上的SRS可通过所述至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。In other words, the second indication information indicates through the indication field in the RRC that the SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第三小区为所属终端设备的所有活跃小区,或所述至少一个第三小区为所属终端设备对应小区组的所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one third cell is all active cells of the terminal equipment to which it belongs, or the at least one third cell is the terminal to which it belongs The device corresponds to all active cells of the cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第二小区组中所有活跃小区。可选的,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group. Optionally, the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第一小区和所述第二小区组中的所有活跃小区。可选的,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the first cell and the second cell group community. Optionally, the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域未配置,或者配置为特定的取值,则所述至少一个第三小区为所述第一小区,即同一个小区上的非周期SRS触发信令只触发本小区上的非周期SRS传输。In some embodiments of the present application, if the indication field is not configured, or is configured with a specific value, the at least one third cell is the first cell, that is, an aperiodic SRS trigger on the same cell The signaling only triggers aperiodic SRS transmission on the local cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第二小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
应理解,所述小区标识也可称为小区编号,本申请对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that the cell identifier may also be referred to as a cell number, which is not specifically limited in this application.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述方法300还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the method 300 may further include:
接收第五RRC信令,所述第五RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区。Receive fifth RRC signaling, where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
例如,终端设备接收网络设备发送的所述第五RRC信令。For example, the terminal device receives the fifth RRC signaling sent by the network device.
换言之,网络设备向终端设备发送所述第五RRC信令,以配置所述至少一个小区。In other words, the network device sends the fifth RRC signaling to the terminal device to configure the at least one cell.
需要说明的是,针对SRS,需要基于SRS资源组(SRS-ResourceSet)或SRS资源(SRS-Resource)进行传输。换言之,终端设备发送的SRS可以是SRS资源组或SRS资源对应的SRS。SRS资源组对应的SRS的时隙偏移是针对 SRS资源组配置的,SRS资源对应的时隙偏移是针对SRS资源配置的。上述介绍的SRS资源组对应的SRS也可以称为普通SRS。可选的,SRS资源组中的用途(usage)域可配置为波束管理(beamManagement),码本(codebook),非码本(nonCodebook),天线切换(antennaSwitching)中的一个。SRS资源对应的SRS也可以为用于定位的SRS,通过RRC信令SRS-PosResource-r16配置,对应的SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-PosResourceSet-r16配置。后面为了描述简单,部分地方只以普通SRS为例来介绍,但是其方案同样适用于定位SRS。It should be noted that, for SRS, transmission needs to be performed based on an SRS resource group (SRS-ResourceSet) or an SRS resource (SRS-Resource). In other words, the SRS sent by the terminal device may be an SRS resource group or an SRS corresponding to an SRS resource. The slot offset of the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group is configured for the SRS resource group, and the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource is configured for the SRS resource. The SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group introduced above may also be referred to as a common SRS. Optionally, the usage field in the SRS resource group may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching). The SRS corresponding to the SRS resource may also be an SRS used for positioning, which is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16, and the corresponding SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16. In order to simplify the description later, only ordinary SRS is used as an example for introduction in some places, but the solution is also applicable to positioning SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell The resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
需要说明的是,本申请各个实施例涉及的SRS资源组均为非周期SRS资源组,SRS资源均为非周期SRS资源。It should be noted that the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
例如,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。For example, the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, through the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
例如,在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。For example, in some embodiments of the present application, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis Takes an integer from 1 to N-1.
例如,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。For example, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法300还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method 300 may further include:
基于第一时隙和所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定第四时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述第一小区的所述第四时隙上,发送所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the fourth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
例如,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。For example, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is an activated timeslot among the multiple timeslot offsets gap offset.
再如,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。For another example, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
再如,所述第四时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。For another example, the fourth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
需要说明的是,本申请各个实施例涉及的SRS资源组均为非周期SRS资源组,SRS资源均为非周期SRS资源。It should be noted that the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
例如,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。For example, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, through the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
例如,在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。For example, in some embodiments of the present application, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
例如,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。For example, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法300还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the method 300 may further include:
基于第一时隙和所第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第五时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述第一小区的所述第五时隙上,发送所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the fifth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
例如,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。For example, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell is the multiple timeslot offsets k' Activated slot offset in slot offset.
再如,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。For another example, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
再如,所述第五时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。For another example, the fifth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
需要说明的是,所述有效时隙也可以理解为可用于上行传输的时隙。所述可用于上行传输的时隙可以理解为仅用于上行传输的时隙,即一直用于上行传输,也可理解为含有上行符号(uplink symbol)的时隙,也可理解为含有灵活符号(flexible symbol)的时隙,也可以理解为灵活时隙(flexible slot),也可以理解为偶尔不可用于上行传输的时隙,例如,偶尔用于下行传输的时隙。可选的,本申请中的可用于上行传输的时隙实际能不能用于上行传输,需要看是否与其他信号发送碰撞。It should be noted that, the valid time slot may also be understood as a time slot available for uplink transmission. The time slot that can be used for uplink transmission can be understood as a time slot only used for uplink transmission, that is, it is always used for uplink transmission, it can also be understood as a time slot containing an uplink symbol (uplink symbol), and it can also be understood as a time slot containing flexible symbols. The time slot of (flexible symbol) can also be understood as a flexible time slot (flexible slot), and it can also be understood as a time slot that is occasionally unavailable for uplink transmission, for example, a time slot that is occasionally used for downlink transmission. Optionally, whether the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission in this application can actually be used for uplink transmission depends on whether it collides with other signal transmissions.
下面结合具体实施例对所述方法200的技术方案进行说明。The technical solution of the method 200 will be described below with reference to specific embodiments.
实施例7:Example 7:
步骤1;step 1;
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
例如,小区聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)配置信息。其中配置有A个小区。针对A个小区中的1个或多个(记为B,B<=A)中的每一个小区(部分情况下,可能有的小区不配置对应的非周期SRS,因此写成A中的1个或多个), 网络设备通过RRC信令携带SRS配置信息,配置1个或多个SRS资源组,每个SRS资源组包含1个或多个SRS资源。下面描述是针对B个小区中的某个小区进行描述,不同小区上的配置可以独立。下面以小区Z为例来描述。For example, cell aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) configuration information. A cells are configured therein. For each cell in one or more of the A cells (denoted as B, B<=A) (in some cases, some cells may not be configured with the corresponding aperiodic SRS, so it is written as one of A or more), the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources. The following description is for a certain cell in the B cells, and the configurations on different cells may be independent. The following description takes the cell Z as an example.
可选的,小区Z上所述SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-ResourceSet配置,所述SRS资源通过RRC信令SRS-Resource配置。Optionally, the SRS resource group on cell Z is configured through RRC signaling SRS-ResourceSet, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-Resource.
可选的,SRS-ResourceSet信令中的用途(usage)域可配置为波束管理(beamManagement),码本(codebook),非码本(nonCodebook),天线切换(antennaSwitching)中的一个。Optionally, the usage field in the SRS-ResourceSet signaling may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
可选的,小区Z上所述SRS资源组配置有多个(记为M个,M>=1)触发状态。可选的,每个触发状态对应非周期SRS触发信令中SRS请求域的一个取值,即一个码点(code point)。例如表1的触发状态的取值。Optionally, the SRS resource group on the cell Z is configured with multiple (denoted as M, M>=1) trigger states. Optionally, each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point. For example, the value of the trigger state in Table 1.
可选的,上述多个触发状态通过SRS-ResourceSet IE中的aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList来配置,其中aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger配置1个值,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置1个或多个值。Optionally, the above multiple trigger states are configured by aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList in the SRS-ResourceSet IE, wherein aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is configured with one value, and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is configured with one or more values.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger取值范围为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
例如,N可以等于非周期SRS触发状态数目(maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates),取值为4。For example, N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which takes a value of 4.
再如,根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定N的取值为4或更大值(例如,8或16);当然,在其他可替代实施例中,可采用其他命名。通过增加非周期SRS触发信令所对应的状态数,可以提高DCI触发非周期SRS的灵活性,提高系统性能。For another example, the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used. By increasing the number of states corresponding to the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling, the flexibility of triggering the aperiodic SRS by the DCI can be improved, and the system performance can be improved.
可选的,所述配置信息通过RRC信令,或者MAC CE信令指示终端设备。Optionally, the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
可选的,终端设备通过终端设备能力上报信息通知网络设备可以支持更多的非周期SRS触发状态(Maximum number of SRS trigger states),即N大于4,以便网络设备基于终端设备上报的能力确定N。Optionally, the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
可选的,所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置。Optionally, the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第二指示信息指示小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y的非周期SRS传输可以通过哪些小区上的非周期SRS触发信令来触发,从而可以实现跨小区触发非周期SRS,降低DCI开销,增加系统灵活性。For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the second indication information which cells the aperiodic SRS transmission of the BWP Y of the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, so as to realize Triggering aperiodic SRS across cells reduces DCI overhead and increases system flexibility.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则终端设备当前所有活跃小区上传输的非周期SRS信令。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。可以触发小区Z上非周期SRS传输基于此,不仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销此时终端设备在任一小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, and if the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, it is the aperiodic SRS signaling transmitted on all active cells currently of the terminal equipment. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z can be triggered. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. At this time, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS on any cell. Trigger signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z.
选项2:Option 2:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上传输的非周期SRS信令。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。可以触发小区Z上非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,这一方面可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS可以有哪些小区上的非周期SRS触发信令来触发,而不是让所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发。这样给网络设备更大的灵活度,提高系统性能。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells. Aperiodic SRS signaling. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z may be triggered. Compared with option 1, this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. . This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上传输的非周期SRS信令。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和小区Z上的非周期SRS信令,都可以触发小区Z上非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,这一方面可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS可以有哪些小区上的非周期SRS触发信令来触发,而不是让所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发。这样给网络设备更大的灵活度,提高系统性能。和选项2相比,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells. Aperiodic SRS signaling. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Both the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z and the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on the cell Z. Compared with option 1, this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. . This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance. Compared with option 2, the indication field can reduce the indication of cell Z, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置;或The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
所述RRC信令通过SRS-ResourceSet配置。The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-ResourceSet.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在上述确定的小区中的某一个(记为Z’)接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的取值大于0(取值记为value),则在小区Z上发送对应的非周期SRS。对应的SRS资源组配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) in one of the above-determined cells (referred to as Z'), and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (referred to as the value of value), the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on cell Z. The corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
可选的,终端设备在小区Z’的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源所在的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z', and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
上面结合实施例7对第二指示信息用于触发SRS资源组对应的SRS的方案进行了说明,下面结合实施例8对所述第二指示信息用于触发SRS资源对应的SRS进行说明。The solution in which the second indication information is used to trigger the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group has been described above with reference to Embodiment 7, and the second indication information is used to trigger the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group with reference to Embodiment 8.
实施例8:Example 8:
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
例如,小区聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)配置信息。其中配置有A个小区。针对A个小区中的1个或多个(记为B,B<=A)中的每一个小区(部分情况下,可能有的小区不配置对应的非周期SRS,因此写成A中的1个或多个),网络设备通过RRC信令携带SRS配置信息,配置1个或多个SRS资源组,每个SRS资源组包含1个或多个SRS资源。下面描述是针对B个小区中的某个小区进行描述,不同小区上的配置可以独立。下面以小区Z为例来描述。For example, cell aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) configuration information. A cells are configured therein. For each cell in one or more of the A cells (denoted as B, B<=A) (in some cases, some cells may not be configured with the corresponding aperiodic SRS, so it is written as one of A or more), the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources. The following description is for a certain cell in the B cells, and the configurations on different cells may be independent. The following description takes the cell Z as an example.
可选的,所述SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-PosResourceSet-r16配置,所述SRS资源通过RRC信令SRS-PosResource-r16配置。Optionally, the SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16.
可选的,针对至少一个所述SRS资源组(记为Set X)配置有多个(记为M个,M>=1)触发状态。可选的,每个触发状态对应非周期SRS触发信令中SRS请求域的一个取值,即一个码点(code point)。例如表1的触发状态的取值。Optionally, at least one of the SRS resource groups (denoted as Set X) is configured with multiple (denoted as M, M>=1) trigger states. Optionally, each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point. For example, the value of the trigger state in Table 1.
可选的,上述多个触发状态通过SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16来配置。Optionally, the above multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 in SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16中每个元素的取值为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
例如,N可以等于非周期SRS触发状态数目(maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates),取值为4。For example, N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
再如,根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定N的取值为4或更大值(例如,8或16);当然,在其他可替代实施例中,可采用其他命名。通过增加非周期SRS触发信令所对应的状态数,可以提高DCI触发非周期SRS的灵活性,提高系统性能。For another example, the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used. By increasing the number of states corresponding to the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling, the flexibility of triggering the aperiodic SRS by the DCI can be improved, and the system performance can be improved.
可选的,所述配置信息通过RRC信令,或者MAC CE信令指示终端设备。Optionally, the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
可选的,终端设备通过终端设备能力上报信息通知网络设备可以支持更多的非周期SRS触发状态(Maximum number of SRS trigger states),即N大于4,以便网络设备基于终端设备上报的能力确定N。Optionally, the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
可选的,所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置。Optionally, the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第二指示信息指示小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y的非周期SRS传输可以通过哪些小区上的非周期SRS触发信令来触发,从而可以实现跨小区触发非周期SRS,降低DCI开销,增加系统灵活性。For the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates through the second indication information which cells the aperiodic SRS transmission of the BWP Y of the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can be triggered by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, so as to realize Triggering aperiodic SRS across cells reduces DCI overhead and increases system flexibility.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate the relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
选项1:Option 1:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,若指示域对应的取值为预先规定的某个值时,则终端设备当前所有活跃小区上传输的非周期SRS信令。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。可以触发小区Z上非周期SRS传输基于此,不仅可简单化所述第一指示信息,还可降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的开销此时终端设备在任一小区上收到非周期SRS触发信令,都可以触发小区Z上的非周期SRS传输。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, and if the value corresponding to the indication field is a predetermined value, the aperiodic SRS signaling transmitted on all active cells currently of the terminal equipment. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z can be triggered. Based on this, not only the first indication information can be simplified, but also the overhead of aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI) can be reduced. At this time, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS on any cell. Trigger signaling can trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z.
选项2:Option 2:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上传输的非周期SRS信令。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。可以触发小区Z上非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,这一方面可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS可以有哪些小区上的非周期SRS触发信令来触发,而不是让所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发。这样给网络设备更大的灵活度,提高系统性能。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells. Aperiodic SRS signaling. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Aperiodic SRS transmission on cell Z may be triggered. Compared with option 1, this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. . This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
选项3:Option 3:
网络设备通过RRC信令配置一个指示域,所述指示域指示一组小区,所述一组小区包含1个或多个小区,则终端设备在所述一组小区中的所有活跃小区上传输的非周期SRS信令。例如,在对应活跃小区配置了对应的非周期SRS的情况下。和小区Z上的非周期SRS信令,都可以触发小区Z上非周期SRS传输。和选项1相比,这一方面可以更灵活地控制一个非周期SRS可以有哪些小区上的非周期SRS触发信令来触发,而不是让所有活跃小区上的非周期SRS触发信令都可以触发。这样给网络设备更大的灵活度,提高系统性能。和选项2相比,所述指示域可以减少对小区Z的指示,从而降低资源开销。The network device configures an indication field through RRC signaling, the indication field indicates a group of cells, and the group of cells includes one or more cells, then the terminal equipment transmits the data on all active cells in the group of cells. Aperiodic SRS signaling. For example, in the case where the corresponding aperiodic SRS is configured for the corresponding active cell. Both the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z and the aperiodic SRS signaling on the cell Z can trigger the aperiodic SRS transmission on the cell Z. Compared with option 1, this aspect can more flexibly control which cells an aperiodic SRS can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, instead of allowing aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on all active cells to be triggered. . This gives the network equipment greater flexibility and improves system performance. Compared with option 2, the indication field can reduce the indication of cell Z, thereby reducing resource overhead.
可选的,上述指示域,通过bitmap来指示一组小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,通过bitmap能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above indication field indicates a group of cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. In many cases, signaling overhead can be reduced through bitmap.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,上述指示域通过小区标识来指示一组小区,即所述指示域包含所述一组小区中每个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, the above-mentioned indication field indicates a group of cells through a cell identity, that is, the indication field includes the identity of each cell in the group of cells, and when the number of cells in the group is small, signaling overhead can be reduced. .
可选的,所述指示域最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述指示域最多指示31,或7,或3个,或1个小区。Optionally, the indication field indicates at most 31, or 7, or 3, or 1 cells.
可选的,所述RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the RRC signaling can be configured in any of the following ways:
所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置;或The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
所述RRC信令通过SRS-ResourceSet配置。The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-ResourceSet.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在上述确定的小区中的某一个(记为Z’)接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的取值大于0(取值记为value),则在小区Z上发送对应的非周期SRS。对应的SRS资源配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) in one of the above-determined cells (referred to as Z'), and the value corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (referred to as the value of value), the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on cell Z. The corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
可选的,终端设备在小区Z’的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z', and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource. SRS resources.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
应理解,实施例2至实施例8中关于指示域以及RRC信令可参见实施例1的具体示例,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for the indication field and the RRC signaling in Embodiments 2 to 8, reference may be made to the specific examples of Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
以上结合附图详细描述了本申请的优选实施方式,但是,本申请并不限于上述实施方式中的具体细节,在本申请的技术构思范围内,可以对本申请的技术方案进行多种简单变型,这些简单变型均属于本申请的保护范围。例如,在上述具体实施方式中所描述的各个具体技术特征,在不矛盾的情况下,可以通过任何合适的方式进行组合,为了避免不必要的重复,本申请对各种可能的组合方式不再另行说明。又例如,本申请的各种不同的实施方式之间也可以进行任意组合,只要其不违背本申请的思想,其同样应当视为本申请所公开的内容。The preferred embodiments of the present application have been described in detail above with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, the present application is not limited to the specific details of the above-mentioned embodiments. Within the scope of the technical concept of the present application, various simple modifications can be made to the technical solutions of the present application. These simple modifications all belong to the protection scope of the present application. For example, the specific technical features described in the above-mentioned specific embodiments can be combined in any suitable manner unless they are inconsistent. In order to avoid unnecessary repetition, this application does not describe any possible combination. State otherwise. For another example, the various embodiments of the present application can also be combined arbitrarily, as long as they do not violate the idea of the present application, they should also be regarded as the content disclosed in the present application.
还应理解,在本申请的各种方法实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行 顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。此外,在本申请实施例中,术语“下行”和“上行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向,其中,“下行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从站点发送至小区的用户设备的第一方向,“上行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从小区的用户设备发送至站点的第二方向,例如,“下行信号”表示该信号的传输方向为第一方向。另外,本申请实施例中,术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系。具体地,A和/或B可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should also be understood that, in the various method embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the present application. The implementation of the embodiments constitutes no limitation. In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, the terms "downlink" and "uplink" are used to indicate the transmission direction of signals or data, wherein "downlink" is used to indicate that the transmission direction of signals or data is from the site to the user equipment of the cell In the first direction, "uplink" is used to indicate that the transmission direction of the signal or data is the second direction sent from the user equipment of the cell to the site. For example, "downlink signal" indicates that the transmission direction of the signal is the first direction. In addition, in this embodiment of the present application, the term "and/or" is only an association relationship for describing associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships. Specifically, A and/or B can represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" in this document generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
上文结合图2至图3,详细描述了本申请的方法实施例,下文结合图4至图9,详细描述本申请的装置实施例。The method embodiments of the present application are described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 2 to 3 , and the apparatus embodiments of the present application are described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 4 to 9 .
图4是本申请实施例的终端设备400的示意性框图。FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图4所示,所述终端设备400可包括:As shown in FIG. 4 , the terminal device 400 may include:
接收单元410,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The receiving unit 410 is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示在第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述第一小区或所述所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, used to trigger the first The SRS on the cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一触发状态,或者在第一小区或所述第一小区上的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,用于触发所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or in aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell The first trigger state is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过第一无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第一RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is carried by the first radio resource control RRC signaling, and the first RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;或Bandwidth Partial Shared Uplink BWP-UplinkCommon; or
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated。The bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示在终端设备的所述第一小区或所述终端设备的目标小区组的所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述终端设备或所述目标小区组对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell of the terminal device or the first cell of the target cell group of the terminal device , which is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过第二无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第二RRC信令通过小区组配置CellGroupConfig配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is carried through the second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured through the cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第二小区,其中,在所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used for Triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第二小区为所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one second cell is all active cells.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区组中所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区和第一小区组中的所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is the first cell and all active cells in the first cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第一小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述接收单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the receiving unit 410 is further configured to:
接收第三RRC信令,所述第三RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区。Receive third RRC signaling, where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell The resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, through the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移; 所述接收单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 410 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS The time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
在所述一个第二小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one second cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell The offset k is the activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k .
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, through the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述接收单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 410 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
在所述一个第二小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one second cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one second cell The corresponding slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k '.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
应理解,装置实施例与方法实施例可以相互对应,类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。具体地,图4所示的终端设备400可以对应于执行本申请实施例的方法200中的相应主体,并且终端设备400中的各个单元的前述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的各个方法中的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments. Specifically, the terminal device 400 shown in FIG. 4 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the terminal device 400 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 . For the sake of brevity, the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
图5是本申请实施例提供的网络设备500的示意性框图。FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of a network device 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图5所示,所述网络设备500可包括:As shown in FIG. 5, the network device 500 may include:
发送单元510,用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The sending unit 510 is configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示在第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述第一小区或所述所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, used to trigger the first The SRS on the cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一触发状态,或者在第一小区或所述第一小区上的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,用于触发所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or in aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell The first trigger state is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过第一无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第一RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is carried by the first radio resource control RRC signaling, and the first RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;或Bandwidth Partial Shared Uplink BWP-UplinkCommon; or
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated。The bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息用于指示在终端设备的所述第一小区或所述终端设备的目标小区组的所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述终端设备或所述目标小区组对应的所述至少一个第二小区上 的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell of the terminal device or the first cell of the target cell group of the terminal device , which is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过第二无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第二RRC信令通过小区组配置CellGroupConfig配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information is carried through the second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured through the cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第二小区,其中,在所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used for Triggering the SRS on the at least one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第二小区为所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one second cell is all active cells.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区组中所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区和第一小区组中的所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is the first cell and all active cells in the first cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第一小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述发送单元510还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the sending unit 510 is further configured to:
发送第三RRC信令,所述第三RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区。Send third RRC signaling, where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell The resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, through the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述发送单元510还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 510 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS The time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
在所述一个第二小区的所述第二时隙上,接收所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one second cell, receive the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell The offset k is the activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k .
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, through the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述发送单元510还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 510 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
在所述一个第二小区的所述第三时隙上,接收所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one second cell, receive the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one second cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述 一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one second cell The corresponding slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k '.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
应理解,装置实施例与方法实施例可以相互对应,类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。具体地,图5所示的网络设备500可以对应于执行本申请实施例的方法200中的相应主体,并且网络设备500中的各个单元的前述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的各个方法中的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments. Specifically, the network device 500 shown in FIG. 5 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the network device 500 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 . For the sake of brevity, the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
图6是本申请实施例提供的终端设备600的示意性框图。FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图6所示,所述终端设备600可包括:As shown in FIG. 6, the terminal device 600 may include:
接收单元610,用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。The receiving unit 610 is configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过第四无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第四RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information is carried through fourth radio resource control RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured through any one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet。SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第三小区,其中,在所述至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述第一小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第三小区为所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one third cell is all active cells.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第二小区组中所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第一小区和所述第二小区组中的所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the first cell and the second cell group community.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第二小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述接收单元610还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the receiving unit 610 is further configured to:
接收第五RRC信令,所述第五RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区。Receive fifth RRC signaling, where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell The resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, through the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述接收单元610还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 610 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定第四时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述第一小区的所述第四时隙上,发送所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the fourth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is the multiple timeslots Active slot offset in offset.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第四时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时 隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the fourth time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, through the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述接收单元610还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 610 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第五时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述第一小区的所述第五时隙上,发送所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the fifth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offsets corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第五时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the fifth time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
应理解,装置实施例与方法实施例可以相互对应,类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。具体地,图6所示的终端设备600可以对应于执行本申请实施例的方法300中的相应主体,并且终端设备600中的各个单元的前述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图3中的各个方法中的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments. Specifically, the terminal device 600 shown in FIG. 6 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 300 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the terminal device 600 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 3 . For the sake of brevity, the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
图7是本申请实施例提供的网络设备700的示意性框图。FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a network device 700 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图7所示,所述网络设备700可包括:As shown in FIG. 7, the network device 700 may include:
发送单元710,用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。The sending unit 710 is configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过第四无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第四RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information is carried through fourth radio resource control RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured through any one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet。SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第三小区,其中,在所述至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述第一小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in the RRC signaling, wherein the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one third cell used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第三小区为所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one third cell is all active cells.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第二小区组中所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第一小区和所述第二小区组中的所有活跃小区。In some embodiments of the present application, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the first cell and the second cell group community.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第二小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述发送单元710还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the sending unit 710 is further configured to:
发送第五RRC信令,所述第五RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区。Send fifth RRC signaling, where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS of the first cell The resource group and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS 配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, through the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE Aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, and the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList uses for configuring one or more trigger states of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述发送单元710还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 710 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定第四时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述第一小区的所述第四时隙上,接收所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。In the fourth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is received.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is the multiple timeslots Active slot offset in offset.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第四时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the fourth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS-Pos resource group version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, so The SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, through the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述发送单元710还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 710 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第五时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time when the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述第一小区的所述第五时隙上,接收所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the fifth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is received.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offsets corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第五时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the fifth time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
应理解,装置实施例与方法实施例可以相互对应,类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。具体地,图7所示的网络设备700可以对应于执行本申请实施例的方法300中的相应主体,并且网络设备700中的各个单元的前述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图3中的各个方法中的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments. Specifically, the network device 700 shown in FIG. 7 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 300 of the embodiment of the present application, and the foregoing and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 700 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 3 . For the sake of brevity, the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
上文中结合附图从功能模块的角度描述了本申请实施例的通信设备。应理解,该功能模块可以通过硬件形式实现,也可以通过软件形式的指令实现,还可以通过硬件和软件模块组合实现。The communication device of the embodiments of the present application is described above from the perspective of functional modules with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be understood that the functional modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, can also be implemented by instructions in the form of software, and can also be implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules.
具体地,本申请实施例中的方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路和/或软件形式的指令完成,结合本申请实施例公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。Specifically, the steps of the method embodiments in the embodiments of the present application may be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor and/or instructions in the form of software, and the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as hardware The execution of the decoding processor is completed, or the execution is completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
可选地,软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域的成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法实施例中的步骤。Optionally, the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps in the above method embodiments in combination with its hardware.
例如,上文涉及的接收单元或发送单元可通过收发器实现。For example, the receiving unit or the transmitting unit referred to above may be implemented by a transceiver.
图8是本申请实施例的通信设备800示意性结构图。FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图8所示,所述通信设备800可包括处理器810。As shown in FIG. 8 , the communication device 800 may include a processor 810 .
其中,处理器810可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。The processor 810 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
请继续参见图8,通信设备800还可以包括存储器820。Continuing to refer to FIG. 8 , the communication device 800 may further include a memory 820 .
其中,该存储器820可以用于存储指示信息,还可以用于存储处理器810执行的代码、指令等。其中,处理器810可以从存储器820中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。存储器820可以是独立于处理器810的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器810中。Wherein, the memory 820 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions, etc. executed by the processor 810 . The processor 810 may call and run a computer program from the memory 820 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application. The memory 820 may be a separate device independent of the processor 810 , or may be integrated in the processor 810 .
请继续参见图8,通信设备800还可以包括收发器830。Continuing to refer to FIG. 8 , the communication device 800 may also include a transceiver 830 .
其中,处理器810可以控制该收发器830与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。收发器830可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器830还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。The processor 810 may control the transceiver 830 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or receive information or data sent by other devices. Transceiver 830 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 830 may further include antennas, and the number of the antennas may be one or more.
应当理解,该通信设备800中的各个组件通过总线系统相连,其中,总线系统除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。It should be understood that various components in the communication device 800 are connected through a bus system, wherein the bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
还应理解,该通信设备800可为本申请实施例的终端设备,并且该通信设备800可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,也就是说,本申请实施例的通信设备800可对应于本申请实施例中的终端设备400或终端设备600,并可以对应于执行根据本申请实施例的方法中的相应主体,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。类似地,该通信设备800可为本申请实施例的网络设备,并且该通信设备800可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程。也就是说,本申请实施例的通信设备800可对应于本申请实施例中的网络设备500或网络设备700,并可以对应于执行根据本申请实施例的方法中的相应主体,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should also be understood that the communication device 800 may be a terminal device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 800 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 800 may correspond to the terminal device 400 or the terminal device 600 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application, which is not repeated here for brevity. Similarly, the communication device 800 may be the network device of the embodiments of the present application, and the communication device 800 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. That is to say, the communication device 800 in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the network device 500 or the network device 700 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application. This will not be repeated here.
此外,本申请实施例中还提供了一种芯片。In addition, the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip.
例如,芯片可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。所述芯片还可以称为系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。可选地,该芯片可应用到各种通信设备中,使得安装有该芯片的通信设备能够执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。For example, the chip may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability, and can implement or execute the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. The chip may also be referred to as a system-on-chip, a system-on-chip, a system-on-a-chip, or a system-on-a-chip, or the like. Optionally, the chip can be applied to various communication devices, so that the communication device installed with the chip can execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
图9是根据本申请实施例的芯片900的示意性结构图。FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip 900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图9所示,所述芯片900包括处理器910。As shown in FIG. 9 , the chip 900 includes a processor 910 .
其中,处理器910可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。The processor 910 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
请继续参见图9,所述芯片900还可以包括存储器920。Please continue to refer to FIG. 9 , the chip 900 may further include a memory 920 .
其中,处理器910可以从存储器920中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。该存储器920可以用于存储指示信息,还可以用于存储处理器910执行的代码、指令等。存储器920可以是独立于处理器910的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器910中。The processor 910 may call and run a computer program from the memory 920 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application. The memory 920 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions and the like executed by the processor 910 . The memory 920 may be a separate device independent of the processor 910 , or may be integrated in the processor 910 .
请继续参见图9,所述芯片900还可以包括输入接口930。Please continue to refer to FIG. 9 , the chip 900 may further include an input interface 930 .
其中,处理器910可以控制该输入接口930与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。The processor 910 may control the input interface 930 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may acquire information or data sent by other devices or chips.
请继续参见图9,所述芯片900还可以包括输出接口940。Please continue to refer to FIG. 9 , the chip 900 may further include an output interface 940 .
其中,处理器910可以控制该输出接口940与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。The processor 910 may control the output interface 940 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may output information or data to other devices or chips.
应理解,所述芯片900可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,也可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the chip 900 can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods in the embodiments of the present application, and can also implement the various methods in the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, the corresponding process implemented by the terminal device in FIG. 1 is not repeated here.
还应理解,该芯片900中的各个组件通过总线系统相连,其中,总线系统除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。It should also be understood that various components in the chip 900 are connected through a bus system, wherein the bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
上文涉及的处理器可以包括但不限于:The processors referred to above may include, but are not limited to:
通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等等。General-purpose processor, Digital Signal Processor (DSP), Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates Or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, and so on.
所述处理器可以用于实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The processor may be used to implement or execute the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
上文涉及的存储器包括但不限于:The memory mentioned above includes but is not limited to:
易失性存储器和/或非易失性存储器。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。Volatile memory and/or non-volatile memory. Wherein, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of illustration and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static RAM (SRAM), Dynamic RAM (DRAM), Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM).
应注意,本文描述的存储器旨在包括这些和其它任意适合类型的存储器。It should be noted that the memory described herein is intended to include these and any other suitable types of memory.
本申请实施例中还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序。该计算机可读存储介质存储一个或多个程序,该一个或多个程序包括指令,该指令当被包括多个应用程序的便携式电子设备执行时,能够使该便携式电子设备执行方法200或300所示实施例的方法。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program. The computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by a portable electronic device including a plurality of application programs, enable the portable electronic device to perform any of the methods 200 or 300. method of the illustrated embodiment.
可选的,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For brevity, here No longer.
可选地,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的移动终端/终端设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执 行本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. , and are not repeated here for brevity.
本申请实施例中还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including a computer program.
可选的,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. Repeat.
可选地,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的移动终端/终端设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中还提供了一种计算机程序。当该计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得计算机可以执行方法200或300所示实施例的方法。A computer program is also provided in the embodiments of the present application. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can execute the method of the embodiment shown in method 200 or 300 .
可选的,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application. When the computer program is run on the computer, it causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity. , and will not be repeated here.
此外,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,所述通信系统可以包括上述涉及的终端设备和网络设备,以形成如图1所示的通信系统100,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。需要说明的是,本文中的术语“系统”等也可以称为“网络管理架构”或者“网络系统”等。In addition, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which may include the above-mentioned terminal equipment and network equipment to form a communication system 100 as shown in FIG. 1 , which is not repeated here for brevity. It should be noted that the terms "system" and the like in this document may also be referred to as "network management architecture" or "network system" and the like.
还应当理解,在本申请实施例和所附权利要求书中使用的术语是仅仅出于描述特定实施例的目的,而非旨在限制本申请实施例。It should also be understood that the terms used in the embodiments of the present application and the appended claims are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments, and are not intended to limit the embodiments of the present application.
例如,在本申请实施例和所附权利要求书中所使用的单数形式的“一种”、“所述”、“上述”和“该”也旨在包括多数形式,除非上下文清楚地表示其他含义。For example, as used in the embodiments of this application and the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "the," "above," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. meaning.
所属领域的技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请实施例的范围。Those skilled in the art can realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Experts may use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a stand-alone product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that make contributions to the prior art or the parts of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk or an optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the above-described systems, devices and units may refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other manners.
例如,以上所描述的装置实施例中单元或模块或组件的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如,多个单元或模块或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些单元或模块或组件可以忽略,或不执行。For example, the division of units, modules or components in the apparatus embodiments described above is only a logical function division, and other division methods may be used in actual implementation. For example, multiple units, modules or components may be combined or integrated. To another system, or some units or modules or components can be ignored, or not implemented.
又例如,上述作为分离/显示部件说明的单元/模块/组件可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元/模块/组件来实现本申请实施例的目的。For another example, the above-mentioned units/modules/components described as separate/display components may or may not be physically separated, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units/modules/components may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the embodiments of the present application.
最后,需要说明的是,上文中显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。Finally, it should be noted that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed above may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms .
以上内容,仅为本申请实施例的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above contents are only specific implementations of the embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application is not limited thereto. Changes or substitutions should all be covered within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (134)

  1. 一种无线通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication method, comprising:
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。Receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示在第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述第一小区或所述所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, which is used to trigger The SRS on the first cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一触发状态,或者在第一小区或所述第一小区上的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,用于触发所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or an aperiodic SRS on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell The first trigger state in the trigger signaling is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。The method according to claim 3, wherein the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  5. 根据权利要求2至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过第一无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第一RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the first indication information is carried by first radio resource control (RRC) signaling, and the first RRC signaling is carried by any one of the following Configuration:
    SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
    服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
    特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
    辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
    服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
    上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
    带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
    带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;或Bandwidth Partial Shared Uplink BWP-UplinkCommon; or
    带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated。The bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示在终端设备的所述第一小区或所述终端设备的目标小区组的所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述终端设备或所述目标小区组对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodicity on the first cell of the terminal equipment or the first cell of the target cell group of the terminal equipment SRS trigger signaling is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the target cell group.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过第二无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第二RRC信令通过小区组配置CellGroupConfig配置。The method according to claim 6, wherein the first indication information is carried by a second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured by a cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第二小区,其中,在所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in RRC signaling, wherein in the first cell The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one second cell is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第二小区为所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 8, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one second cell is all active cells.
  10. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区组中所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 8, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。The method according to claim 10, wherein the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  12. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区和第一小区组中的所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 8, wherein, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is one of the first cell and the first cell group. All active cells.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。The method according to claim 12, wherein the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  14. 根据权利要求10至13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第一小区组。The method according to any one of claims 10 to 13, wherein the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  15. 根据权利要求1至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第三RRC信令,所述第三RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区。Receive third RRC signaling, where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。The method according to claim 15, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the first cell is configured by SRS-ResourceSet signaling. SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of one cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 16, wherein the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, an SRS resource group information element is used The aperiodic SRS resource in the SRS-ResourceSet IE triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, The aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is used to configure one or more than one trigger states among the multiple non-zero trigger states.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。The method according to claim 18, wherein the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; each of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis The value of the element is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 19, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  21. 根据权利要求16至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法包括:The method according to any one of claims 16 to 20, wherein the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method comprises: :
    基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所 述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS The time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
    在所述一个第二小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one second cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 21, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resource group of the one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets. The corresponding slot offset k is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  23. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。The method according to claim 21, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with a time slot offset, and the one time slot offset is the time slot offset gap offset k.
  24. 根据权利要求21至23中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 21 to 23, wherein the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  25. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。The method according to claim 15, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell use different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 information Let the configuration, the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 25, wherein the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。The method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, the SRS - AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration in PosResourceSet-r16 for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。The method according to claim 27, wherein the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 28, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  30. 根据权利要求25至29中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 25 to 29, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; The method also includes:
    基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
    在所述一个第二小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one second cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one second cell is sent.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 30, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resource group of the one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets. The slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in is an activated slot offset among the multiple slot offsets.
  32. 根据权利要求30所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。The method according to claim 30, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with a time slot offset, and the one time slot offset is the time slot offset Gap offset k'.
  33. 根据权利要求30至32中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 30 to 32, wherein the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  34. 一种无线通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication method, comprising:
    发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。Send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on at least one second cell.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示在第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述第一小区或所述所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 34, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, which is used to trigger The SRS on the first cell or the at least one second cell corresponding to the first BWP.
  36. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一触发状态,或者在第一小区或所述第一小区上的第一带宽部分BWP上的非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,用于触发所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 34, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate a first trigger state, or an aperiodic SRS on the first cell or the first bandwidth part BWP on the first cell The first trigger state in the trigger signaling is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the first trigger state.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。The method of claim 36, wherein the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  38. 根据权利要求35至37中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过第一无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第一RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:The method according to any one of claims 35 to 37, wherein the first indication information is carried by first radio resource control (RRC) signaling, and the first RRC signaling is carried by any one of the following Configuration:
    SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
    服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
    特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
    辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
    服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
    上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
    带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
    带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;或Bandwidth Partial Shared Uplink BWP-UplinkCommon; or
    带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated。The bandwidth portion is dedicated to the uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  39. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息用于指示在终端设备的所述第一小区或所述终端设备的目标小区组的所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,用于触发所述终端设备或所述目标小区组对应的所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 34, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate aperiodicity on the first cell of the terminal equipment or the first cell of the target cell group of the terminal equipment SRS trigger signaling is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell corresponding to the terminal device or the target cell group.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过第二无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第二RRC信令通过小区组配置CellGroupConfig配置。The method according to claim 39, wherein the first indication information is carried by a second radio resource control RRC signaling, and the second RRC signaling is configured by a cell group configuration CellGroupConfig.
  41. 根据权利要求34至40中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第二小区,其中,在所述第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述至少一个第二小区上的SRS。The method according to any one of claims 34 to 40, wherein the first indication information indicates the at least one second cell through an indication field in RRC signaling, wherein in the first cell The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the at least one second cell is used to trigger the SRS on the at least one second cell.
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第二小区为所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 41, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one second cell is all active cells.
  43. 根据权利要求41所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区组中所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 41, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is all active cells in the first cell group.
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。The method according to claim 43, wherein the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  45. 根据权利要求41所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第一小区组,所述至少一个第二小区为所述第一小区和第一小区组中的所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 41, wherein, if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the first cell group, the at least one second cell is one of the first cell and the first cell group. All active cells.
  46. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。The method according to claim 12, wherein the maximum number of cells in the first cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  47. 根据权利要求43至46中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第一小区组。The method according to any one of claims 43 to 46, wherein the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the first cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  48. 根据权利要求34至47中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 34 to 47, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第三RRC信令,所述第三RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区。Send third RRC signaling, where the third RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one second cell.
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。The method according to claim 48, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the first cell is configured by SRS-ResourceSet signaling. SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of one cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 49, wherein the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  51. 根据权利要求49或50所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。The method according to claim 49 or 50, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, the SRS resource group information element is used The aperiodic SRS resource in the SRS-ResourceSet IE triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, The aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is used to configure one or more than one trigger states among the multiple non-zero trigger states.
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。The method according to claim 51, wherein the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; each of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis The value of the element is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 52, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  54. 根据权利要求49至53中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法包括:The method according to any one of claims 49 to 53, wherein the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method comprises: :
    基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS The time slot where the trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling value;
    在所述一个第二小区的所述第二时隙上,接收所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one second cell, receive the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one second cell.
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 54, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resource group of the one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets. The corresponding slot offset k is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  56. 根据权利要求54所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。The method according to claim 54, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with a time slot offset, and the one time slot offset is the time slot offset gap offset k.
  57. 根据权利要求54至56中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 54 to 56, wherein the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for SRS transmission gap.
  58. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第二小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。The method according to claim 48, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one second cell use different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 information Let the configuration, the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 58, wherein the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  60. 根据权利要求58或59所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第二小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。The method according to claim 58 or 59, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one second cell, the SRS - AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration in PosResourceSet-r16 for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。The method according to claim 60, wherein the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 61, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  63. 根据权利要求58至62中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 58 to 62, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each of the at least one second cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; The method also includes:
    基于第一时隙和所述至少一个第二小区中的一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one second cell in the at least one second cell, and the first time slot is the The time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one second cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the trigger in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling the value of the state;
    在所述一个第二小区的所述第三时隙上,接收所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one second cell, receive the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one second cell.
  64. 根据权利要求63所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个第二小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 63, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resource group of the one second cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets. The slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in is an activated slot offset among the multiple slot offsets.
  65. 根据权利要求63所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二小区中的每一个第二小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。The method according to claim 63, wherein the SRS resource group of each second cell in the at least one second cell is configured with a time slot offset, and the one time slot offset is the time slot offset Gap offset k'.
  66. 根据权利要求63至65中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 63 to 65, wherein the third time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  67. 一种无线通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication method, comprising:
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。Receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
  68. 根据权利要求67所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息通过第四无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第四RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:The method according to claim 67, wherein the second indication information is carried by fourth RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
    SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
    服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
    特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
    辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
    服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
    上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
    带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
    带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
    带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
    SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet。SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet.
  69. 根据权利要求67或68所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第三小区,其中,在所述至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述第一小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 67 or 68, wherein the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in RRC signaling, wherein the at least one third cell The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
  70. 根据权利要求69所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第三小区为所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 69, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one third cell is all active cells.
  71. 根据权利要求69所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第二小区组中所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 69, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group.
  72. 根据权利要求71所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。The method according to claim 71, wherein the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  73. 根据权利要求69所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第一小区和所述第二小区组中的所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 69, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is the first cell and the second cell group All active cells in .
  74. 根据权利要求73所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。The method according to claim 73, wherein the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  75. 根据权利要求71至74中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第二小区组。The method according to any one of claims 71 to 74, wherein the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  76. 根据权利要求67至75中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 67 to 75, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第五RRC信令,所述第五RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区。Receive fifth RRC signaling, where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。The method according to claim 76, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the first cell is configured by SRS-ResourceSet signaling. SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of one cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  78. 根据权利要求77所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 77, wherein the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  79. 根据权利要求77或78所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。The method according to claim 77 or 78, wherein for the multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, the SRS resource group information element is used. The aperiodic SRS resource in the SRS-ResourceSet IE triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, The aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is used to configure one or more than one trigger states among the multiple non-zero trigger states.
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。The method according to claim 79, wherein the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; each of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis The value of the element is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  81. 根据权利要求80所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 80, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  82. 根据权利要求77至81中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 77 to 81, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method further comprises:
    基于第一时隙和所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定第四时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述第一小区的所述第四时隙上,发送所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the fourth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
  83. 根据权利要求82所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 82, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is the Activated slot offset among multiple slot offsets.
  84. 根据权利要求82所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时 隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。The method according to claim 82, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  85. 根据权利要求82至84中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 82 to 84, wherein the fourth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  86. 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。The method according to claim 76, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell pass through different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 information. Let the configuration, the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resources version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  87. 根据权利要求86所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 86, wherein the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  88. 根据权利要求86或87所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。The method according to claim 86 or 87, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, the SRS - AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration in PosResourceSet-r16 for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
  89. 根据权利要求88所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。The method according to claim 88, wherein the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  90. 根据权利要求89所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 89, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  91. 根据权利要求86至91中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 86 to 91, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the method further comprises:
    基于第一时隙和所第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第五时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述第一小区的所述第五时隙上,发送所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the fifth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is sent.
  92. 根据权利要求91所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 91, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell correspond to The slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  93. 根据权利要求91所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。The method according to claim 91, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  94. 根据权利要求91至93中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第五时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 91 to 93, wherein the fifth time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot available for SRS transmission gap.
  95. 一种无线通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication method, comprising:
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。Sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the sounding reference signal SRS on the first cell can be triggered by aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on at least one third cell.
  96. 根据权利要求95所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息通过第四无线资源控制RRC信令承载,所述第四RRC信令通过以下中的任一项配置:The method according to claim 95, wherein the second indication information is carried by a fourth RRC signaling, and the fourth RRC signaling is configured by any one of the following:
    SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
    服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
    特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
    辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
    服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
    上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
    带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
    带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
    带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
    SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet。SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet.
  97. 根据权利要求95或96所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息通过RRC信令中的指示域指示所述至少一个第三小区,其中,在所述至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令用于触发所述第一小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 95 or 96, wherein the second indication information indicates the at least one third cell through an indication field in RRC signaling, wherein the at least one third cell The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is used to trigger the SRS on the first cell.
  98. 根据权利要求97所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值为预设值,所述至少一个第三小区为所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 97, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is a preset value, the at least one third cell is all active cells.
  99. 根据权利要求97所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第二小区组中所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 97, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is all active cells in the second cell group.
  100. 根据权利要求99所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。The method according to claim 99, wherein the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  101. 根据权利要求97所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述指示域对应的取值用于指示第二小区组,所述至少一个第三小区为所述第一小区和所述第二小区组中的所有活跃小区。The method according to claim 97, wherein if the value corresponding to the indication field is used to indicate the second cell group, the at least one third cell is the first cell and the second cell group All active cells in .
  102. 根据权利要求101所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二小区组中小区的最大数量为1、2、3、4、7、8、31或32。The method according to claim 101, wherein the maximum number of cells in the second cell group is 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 31 or 32.
  103. 根据权利要求99至102中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示域对应的取值通过位图或小区标识指示所述第二小区组。The method according to any one of claims 99 to 102, wherein the value corresponding to the indication field indicates the second cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  104. 根据权利要求95至103中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 95 to 103, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第五RRC信令,所述第五RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区。Send fifth RRC signaling, where the fifth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, and the at least one cell includes the first cell and the at least one third cell.
  105. 根据权利要求104所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS 资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。The method according to claim 104, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the first cell is configured by SRS-ResourceSet signaling. The SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of one cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling.
  106. 根据权利要求105所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS资源SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 105, wherein the SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  107. 根据权利要求105或106所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。The method according to claim 105 or 106, wherein for the multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, the SRS resource group information element is used The aperiodic SRS resource in the SRS-ResourceSet IE triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure a trigger state in the multiple non-zero trigger states, The aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is used to configure one or more than one trigger states among the multiple non-zero trigger states.
  108. 根据权利要求107所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。The method according to claim 107, wherein the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; each of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis The value of the element is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  109. 根据权利要求108所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 108, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  110. 根据权利要求105至109中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 105 to 109, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method further comprises:
    基于第一时隙和所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定第四时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fourth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell, the first time slot is the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located, and the The SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述第一小区的所述第四时隙上,接收所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。In the fourth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is received.
  111. 根据权利要求110所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 110, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell is the Activated slot offset among multiple slot offsets.
  112. 根据权利要求110所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。The method according to claim 110, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  113. 根据权利要求110至112中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 110 to 112, wherein the fourth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for SRS transmission gap.
  114. 根据权利要求104所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区和所述至少一个第三小区中的不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。The method according to claim 104, wherein the SRS resource groups of different cells in the first cell and the at least one third cell pass through different SRS-Pos resource groups Version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 information. Let the configuration, the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell are configured through different SRS Pos resources version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  115. 根据权利要求114所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 114, wherein the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  116. 根据权利要求114或115所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述至少一个第三小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。The method according to claim 114 or 115, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the at least one third cell, the SRS - AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration in PosResourceSet-r16 for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
  117. 根据权利要求116所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。The method according to claim 116, wherein the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  118. 根据权利要求117所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 117, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  119. 根据权利要求114至118中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 114 to 118, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with at least one time slot offset; the method further comprises:
    基于第一时隙和所第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第五时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述第一小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The fifth time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell, where the first time slot is the time where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located slot, the SRS resource group of the first cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述第一小区的所述第五时隙上,接收所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the fifth time slot of the first cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the first cell is received.
  120. 根据权利要求119所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有多个时隙偏移,所述第一小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 119, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell are configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the first cell correspond to The slot offset k' is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  121. 根据权利要求119所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。The method according to claim 119, wherein the SRS resource group of the first cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  122. 根据权利要求119至121中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第五时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 119 to 121, wherein the fifth time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  123. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:接收单元,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。A terminal device, comprising: a receiving unit configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that an aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on a first cell is used to trigger at least one SRS on the second cell.
  124. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:发送单元,用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发至少一个第二小区上的SRS。A network device, comprising: a sending unit configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that an aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on a first cell is used to trigger at least one SRS on the second cell.
  125. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:接收单元,用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。A terminal device, characterized by comprising: a receiving unit configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that a sounding reference signal SRS on a first cell can pass through a non-contact signal on at least one third cell. Periodic SRS trigger signaling trigger.
  126. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:发送单元,用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示第一小区上的探测参考信号SRS可通过至少一个第三小区上的非周期SRS触发信令触发。A network device, characterized by comprising: a sending unit configured to send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that a sounding reference signal SRS on a first cell can pass through a non-contact signal on at least one third cell. Periodic SRS trigger signaling trigger.
  127. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A terminal device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器、存储器和收发器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行权利要求1至33中任一项所述的方法。A processor, a memory and a transceiver, the memory for storing a computer program, the processor for invoking and running the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 33.
  128. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器、存储器和收发器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行权利要求34至66中任一项所述的方法。A processor, a memory and a transceiver, the memory for storing a computer program, the processor for invoking and running the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 34 to 66.
  129. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A terminal device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器、存储器和收发器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行权利要求67至94中任一项所述的方法。A processor, a memory and a transceiver, the memory for storing a computer program, the processor for invoking and running the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 67 to 94.
  130. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器、存储器和收发器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行权利要求95至122中任一项所述的方法。A processor, a memory and a transceiver, the memory for storing a computer program, the processor for invoking and running the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 95 to 122.
  131. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括:A chip, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至33中任一项所述的方法或如权利要求67至94中任一项所述的方法。A processor for invoking and running a computer program from a memory to cause a device on which the chip is installed to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 33 or as described in any one of claims 67 to 94 Methods.
  132. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求34至66中任一项所述的方法或如权利要求95至122中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by being used for storing a computer program, the computer program causing a computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 34 to 66 or any one of claims 95 to 122 the method described.
  133. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机程序指令,所述计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求34至66中任一项所述的方法或如权利要求95至122中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising computer program instructions that cause a computer to perform the method of any one of claims 34 to 66 or the method of any one of claims 95 to 122 Methods.
  134. 一种计算机程序,其特征在于,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求34至66中任一项所述的方法或如权利要求95至122中任一项所述的方法。A computer program, characterized in that the computer program causes a computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 34 to 66 or the method as claimed in any one of claims 95 to 122.
PCT/CN2020/117817 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device WO2022061735A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/117817 WO2022061735A1 (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device
CN202080102886.4A CN115804221A (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/117817 WO2022061735A1 (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022061735A1 true WO2022061735A1 (en) 2022-03-31

Family

ID=80846111

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/117817 WO2022061735A1 (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115804221A (en)
WO (1) WO2022061735A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140355546A1 (en) * 2010-03-05 2014-12-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Aperiodic transmission method and apparatus for sounding reference signal in wireless communication system
CN106712919A (en) * 2015-11-18 2017-05-24 华为技术有限公司 Uplink detection signal triggering method, device and system
CN107360630A (en) * 2016-05-10 2017-11-17 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 The cut-in method and device of a kind of uplink detection reference signal
CN109587809A (en) * 2014-03-27 2019-04-05 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 A kind of method and apparatus of aperiodic SRS

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140355546A1 (en) * 2010-03-05 2014-12-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Aperiodic transmission method and apparatus for sounding reference signal in wireless communication system
CN109587809A (en) * 2014-03-27 2019-04-05 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 A kind of method and apparatus of aperiodic SRS
CN106712919A (en) * 2015-11-18 2017-05-24 华为技术有限公司 Uplink detection signal triggering method, device and system
CN107360630A (en) * 2016-05-10 2017-11-17 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 The cut-in method and device of a kind of uplink detection reference signal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115804221A (en) 2023-03-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN114451043A (en) Data transmission method and device
US20210160852A1 (en) Resource configuration method and terminal device
WO2018228586A1 (en) Communication method, network device, and user equipment
US20220030565A1 (en) Method and device for adjusting pdcch monitoring period
CN113271683A (en) Method for communication based on UE capability, UE and network side equipment
WO2022152068A1 (en) Resource determination method, communication device, and storage medium
US20210385799A1 (en) Resource indicating method, apparatus, access network device, terminal and system
WO2019158018A1 (en) Method for transmitting paging message
JP2023512807A (en) Method and apparatus for supporting reduced capacity devices in wireless communications
WO2020248143A1 (en) Power control method, terminal device and network device
TW202019215A (en) Carrier processing method, terminal, network device and storage medium
CN111034242B (en) Method and device for sending cell configuration information
WO2023050402A1 (en) Method and apparatus for beam determination
WO2022061735A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2022061777A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2022061733A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2022036719A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2023050260A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2022099556A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
CN112771963B (en) Information notification method and device
WO2023065334A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
EP4340498A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining repeated transmission, terminal, and network side device
WO2023240630A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
US20240031092A1 (en) Terminal device and network device
WO2023133706A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus, terminal device and network terminal

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20954587

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20954587

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1